Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors 2018

Transcription

1

2 Introduction INTRODUCTION The s (HCD) welcomes your participation in the housing assistance programs. It is our pleasure to present the Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors, for the rehabilitation, construction, or reconstruction of homes that qualify for HCD housing assistance in the. It is important for the Contractors to know that a great deal of time and effort has been committed to ensuring that the Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors meet standard construction practices. This document applies to all Contractors on the Rotating Contractor List, applicants to the List, as well as all construction projects as a part of the Contract Documents. All Contractors providing services and/or materials are required to perform in accordance with the Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors on all housing rehabilitation, construction or reconstruction activities. As the Scope of Work, provided by HCD personnel, is keyed to the Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors, Contractors are encouraged to familiarize themselves with the standards set herein. While the HCD endeavors to promulgate Specifications that are accurate, performance based, and non-restrictive for bidding purposes; the manufacturer s name and article numbers are often included for demonstration and / or performance purposes. The intent of the Specifications, as a part of the Contract Documents, is to provide clarity and consistency in Bidding, the Scope of Work, and the finished construction outcome. Contractors must attend a Contractor Registration Meeting scheduled by the Housing Development Program Manager and submit all required documentation for review and approval prior to inclusion on the Rotating Contractor List. Contractor Registration Meetings will be held semi-annually (January and July), dependent upon requests received for inclusion on the Rotating Contractor List. Applicants will be notified of the next Contractor Registration Meeting, based on contact information submitted. A review of all applications will be undertaken by the HCD staff and will include previous work practices and ethics. Applicants that have verifiable performance issues will not qualify to participate in the HCD housing assistance programs. Contractors currently on the Rotating Contractor List are required to update their files prior to the expiration date of any license, certification, or membership. Failure to update licenses, insurance certifications, memberships, etc., prior to the expiration date may result in temporary suspension from the Rotating Contractor List and/or removal from the Rotating Contractor List. Attendance at a Contractor Registration Meeting is also required at least once every two years to remain active on the Rotating Contractor s List. Customer service is a very important aspect of any successful organization. The HCD has high expectations for our projects and expects our Contractors to share our goals to provide exceptional customer service delivered with a high level of respect toward our customers and their property. Through teamwork and cooperation with qualified Contractors, we are providing a vital service to the residents of the. END OF INTRODUCTION

3 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 00 General Conditions Introduction Table of Contents Division 00 General Conditions Definitions page 1 2. License and Certification page 2 3. Insurance page 2 4. Contractor Registration Meeting page 3 5. Rotating Contractor List page 3 6. Suspension page 3 7. Voluntary Withdrawal page 4 8. Termination page 4 9. Bidding of Projects page Pre-Bid Meeting page Scope of Work page Bids and Proposals page Bid Selection page Bid Protests page Respect of Person and Property page Contractor Requirements page Building Codes and Permits page Notice of Commencement page Commencement of Work page Contractor Identification page Progress Inspections page Change Orders page Incidental Items page Security page Loss or Damage of Work page Correction of Work page Completion of Work page Warranty page Billing and Payments page Retainage page Subcontractors page Contractor Evaluations page Disputes page Governmental Requirements page Standards page 14 Division 01 General Requirements Invitation to Bid & Instructions to Bidders Bid Form Suspension and Debarment Certification Agreement, General Conditions, & Forms Housing Rehabilitation Work Contract Price and Payment Procedures Request for Payment Contractor Affidavit and Release of Liens Owner Authorization Warranty Acknowledgement Change Order Unit Prices Administrative Requirements Quality Requirements Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Pre-bid Substitution Post-bid Substitution Execution Requirements Warranty Roofing Warranty Contractor Warranty Division 02 Existing Conditions Demolition Regulated Materials Division 03 Concrete Cast-In-Place Concrete Division 04 Masonry Unit Masonry Masonry Repointing Division 05 Metals Metal Fabrications Division 06 Wood, Plastics, Composites Rough Carpentry Finish Carpentry Cultured Marble Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection Preparation for Re-roofing Insulation Asphalt Shingle Roofing Modified Bituminous Roofing Gutters and Downspouts Joint Sealants

4 Table of Contents Division 08 Openings Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Flush Wood Doors Shower Doors Aluminum Sliding Glass Patio Doors Aluminum Windows Hardware Glazing Division 09 Finishes Gypsum Plaster Portland Cement Plaster Gypsum Board Assemblies Tile Resilient Flooring Carpeting Painting Division 10 Specialties Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Division 11 Equipment Equipment Division 12 Furnishings Not Used Division 13 Special Construction Not Used Division 21 Fire Suppression Not Used Division 22 Plumbing Plumbing Division 23 HVAC Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Division 26 Electrical Electrical Division 27 Communications Division 31 Earthwork Earthwork Division 32 Exterior Improvements Turf and Grasses Division 33 - Utilities Not Used END OF SECTION

5 General Conditions GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 Definitions 1.1 Acceptable Bid Range Ten percent (10%) above or below the HCD in-house estimated cost for construction. 1.2 Active Contractor has submitted all required documentation, which has been reviewed and approved; thereby allowing the Contractor to be included on the Rotating Contractor List. 1.3 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1.4 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1.5 Bid Chiseling and/or Shopping Bidding on a project then sending out portions of the work to re-bid for a lower price once the Contract has been signed and/or Bids have been submitted to HCD. 1.6 Change Order Method of modification to a Contract. 1.7 Contract A legally enforceable agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, which supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract amount is amended by Change Order only. The Contract shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The HCD shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract Documents intended to facilitate project completion. 1.8 Contract Documents The Contract Documents consist of the Housing Rehabilitation Work Contract between the Owner and Contractor, the Bid Proposal, and the Bid Documents including but not limited to, the Scope of Work write up, Supplemental Bid Information, Addenda, and the HCD s Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors, issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Contract, modification issued and executed after execution of the Contract. The Contract Documents are the basis for the Contract. 1.9 Drawings If utilized, are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimension of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. Drawings are supported by the Contract Documents of which they are a part General Contractor / Contractor A legally licensed person who agrees to furnish materials or perform services at specific prices for construction. Contractors must be approved by the HCD HCD - of the Inactive Contractor is no longer active due to lapse in required documentation, training, as requested, etc No Bid Notification Written notification indicating Contractor s intent not to Bid the project Owner Person or entity identified as such in the Contract and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contracts may be the whole or a part Responsible Bidder A person who has the capability in all respects to perform the contract requirements fully, and the tenacity, perseverance, experience, integrity, ability, reliability, capacity, facilities, equipment, financial resources and credit which will assure good faith performance Responsive Conforming with all the material terms and conditions of the Invitation To Bid Retainage Any amount of the contract that is withheld in order to ensure that the contract is completed in its entirety Rotating Contractor List List of active Contractors that are eligible to Bid on HCD assisted rehabilitation projects.

6 General Conditions Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors (current edition) HCD manual that outlines the rehabilitation program, participation requirements for Contractors, and material specifications. The Manual is a part of every project by referenced inclusion in the Scope of Work Scope of Work Written outline of the Work to be completed on a Project. The Scope of Work is supported by the Contract Documents of which it is a part Specifications That portion of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. The Specifications are supported by the Contract Documents of which they are a part Standards Level of quality and/or performance that are considered acceptable for the rehabilitation work Suspension To render inactive temporarily; to cease participation for a pre-determined period of time. A Contractor on the Rotating Contractor List may be temporarily suspended from active status if they have expired insurance, Contractor s license, business license, etc. Active status will not be returned until all required documentation is provided Subcontractor A legally licensed person or entity that has a direct Contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work that is contracted and is referred to throughout the Contacts as if singular in number. Subcontractors usually contract for a specific type of work (HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, Roofing, etc ), with a General Contractor Termination To bring to a permanent end Unit Price Cost for a defined quantity of work, usually based on a specific type of work i.e. wood deck replacement per square foot Unsatisfactory Work Work does not meet the minimum standards set forth in the project specifications and/or is in violation of City Code Work The term Work means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 2 License, Certification, and Approval 2.1 To be included on the HCD Rotating Contractor List and provide Work for projects funded through the HCD housing assistance programs, Contractors are required to maintain and submit copies of all required Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals necessary to perform work in the State of Florida and as required on the current HCD Contractor Registration Application. 2.2 All Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals must be maintained throughout the entire duration of each project. Contractors are responsible for providing proof of updated and/or renewal Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals to HCD, prior to the expiration date. 2.3 Contractors that have been Suspended or Debarred from providing service to Federal, State, or local governments will be removed from the HCD Rotating Contractor List. 3 Insurance 3.1 Contractors are responsible for submitting and maintaining current and accurate insurance information to the HCD Program Manager. 3.2 All required insurance must be current for the duration of each project. 3.3 All insurance certificates must come directly to the HCD from the insurance provider. Updated and/or renewal certificates must also be provided by the insurance provider directly to the HCD.

7 General Conditions See Section for insurance coverage requirements. 4 Contractor Registration Meeting 4.1 Contractors are required to attend a Contractor Registration Meeting and submit all required documentation for review and approval prior to inclusion on the Rotating Contractor List. 4.2 The Contractor Registration Meeting is designed to provide the Contractor with the necessary information to guide them in the application requirements and inform them of the HCD s Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors. 4.3 Contractor Registration Meetings will be scheduled semi-annually, January and July, dependent upon requests received for inclusion on the Rotating Contractor List and scheduled by the HCD Program Manager. 4.4 Contractors currently on the Rotating Contractor List are required to attend a Contractor Registration Meeting at least once every two years to remain active on the Rotating Contractor List. 5 Rotating Contractor List 5.1 Contractor must meet all License and Certification requirements indicated on the current Contractor Qualification Application; including but not limited to, Contractor license(s), occupational license / business tax receipt, lead based paint certification, insurance certifications, etc. 5.2 Contractor must meet all insurance requirements. 5.3 Contractor will be required to submit to a background check. 5.4 Contractor must be in good standing on previous construction projects. 5.5 Contractor must use regular full time or part time employees. Use of day labor is not permitted. 5.6 Contractor must use Trade Subcontractors for all work requiring permits or the expertise of a trade professional, including but not limited to: Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Roof. 5.7 Contractors and Subcontractors must not have a Suspension or Debarment from any Federal, State, or Local Program. Contractors are responsible for verification of Subcontractor compliance. 5.8 Contractors currently on the Rotating Contractor List are required to update their Contractor Qualification Application Form prior to the end of each calendar year, including all licenses and insurance documents. 5.9 The Rotating Contractor List is randomly generated with active status Contractors. All Contractors are provided an opportunity to Bid (subject to Article 7.3) prior to random generation of the next list of active status Contractors. 6 Suspension - Loss of Active Status 6.1 If a Contractor is found to be in violation of the Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for the Contractor, the Contractor will be subject to suspension from active status by the HCD Program Manager and not permitted to Bid on projects until violations are corrected. 6.2 A Contractor will be temporarily suspended from the Rotating Contractor List if all licenses, certifications, and/or insurance policies are permitted to expire or renewal information is not provided to the HCD. Contractor will remain suspended and not permitted to Bid on projects until all required documentation is submitted. 6.3 If a Contractor receives three (3) complaints or three (3) unsatisfactory evaluations under Article 32 (Contractor Evaluations) in a one-year period, the Contractor will be subject to suspension from active status by the HCD Program Manager or HCD Management and not permitted to Bid on projects until

8 General Conditions the Contractor provides positive resolution to the negative issues, including written documentation of the positive resolution. 6.4 If a Contractor fails to submit a Bid on three (3) Bid opportunities during a two-year period, the Contractor will be subject to suspension from active status by the HCD Program Manager and not permitted to Bid on projects until the Contractor provides positive resolution to the inactivity, including written documentation of the positive resolution. 6.5 If a Contractor is being reviewed for work performance or ethical concerns, the Contractor may be suspended from active status and not permitted to Bid on projects until the review is completed. 6.6 If the Contractor enters into a dispute with the Owner or the City, the Contractor may be suspended from active status and not permitted to Bid on projects until the dispute has been resolved. 6.7 If upon investigation, a Contractor s Work is deemed unsatisfactory, the HCD Program Manager reserves the right to suspend the Contractor from active status and not permitted to Bid on projects until the Contractor can provide positive resolution to ongoing construction quality issues, including written documentation of the positive resolution. 6.8 If a Contractor fails to turn in a complete Bid or a written No Bid Explanation on two (2) consecutive Bid opportunities, the Contractor will be subject to suspension from active status by the HCD Program Manager. The Contractor is not permitted to Bid on projects until the Contractor requests, in writing, to return to active status with an explanation of corrective measures taken to correct the problem. 6.9 The HCD Program Manager may suspend a Contractor s active status for a period of up to one year for repeated and / or multiple infractions of the HCD s Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors. Written notification of any suspension will be provided by the HCD Program Manager If the winning Bid Contractor refuses to accept the project, enter into Contract, or refuses to complete the Project; the HCD Program Manager reserves the right to suspend the Contractor from active status and not be permitted to Bid on projects for a period of one (1) year Any suspension of active status for a period of one year will require that Contractor s attendance of a regularly scheduled Contractor Registration Meeting prior to being reinstated to active status Failure of a Contractor to take corrective measures and resolve deficiencies to be reinstated to active status, in a timely manner, will escalate the Contractor s status from suspension to removal from the Rotating Contractor List. See Article 8 of the HCD Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors. 7 Voluntary Withdrawal - Rotating Contractor List or Bid 7.1 The Contractor has the right to voluntarily withdraw his/her name from the Rotating Contractor List at any time. 7.2 The Contractor shall send written request to withdraw from the Rotating Contractor List to the attention of the HCD Program Manager. 7.3 The HCD Program Manager has the right to bypass a Contractor on the next bidding cycle due to excessive work load, time commitment issues, performance issues, etc., without affecting the Contractors active status on the Rotating Contractor List. 7.4 The Contractor has the right to withdraw from a bid prior to the signing of the contract with the Owner. 8 Termination 8.1 The Contractor shall be terminated from the project upon the occurrence of one or more of the following actions: Breach of contract with the Owner;

9 General Conditions Failure to provide the HCD with evidence of current license or insurance, or proof of renewed coverage in the case of cancellation; Failure to comply with the HCD Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors or the Contract Documents; Failure to resolve warranty requirements; Failure to comply with Orlando City Code; or Misrepresentations of material fact provided in the bid, in the information submitted for the Contractor List, or in the documentation submitted for payment. 8.2 If the Contractor is terminated from a project, under Article 8.1, they are subject to immediate and permanent removal from the Rotating Contractor List. 8.3 If a Contractor fails to comply with the HCD Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors and / or the Contract Documents for projects, without just cause, on one or more occasions, they are subject to permanent removal from the Rotating Contractor List. 8.4 The HCD Program Manager reserves the right to escalate a Contractor s suspended status to permanent removal from the Rotating Contractor List if the Contractor fails to take corrective measures and resolve deficiencies to be reinstated to active status, in a timely manner and as outlined in Article If the Contractor disputes the removal from the Contractor List, such dispute must be submitted, in writing, to the HCD Director within five (5) business days of receiving notice of removal from the list. 8.6 The HCD Director will make a determination within five (5) business days based on the information provided by the Contractor and the Housing Development Program Manager and that determination will be final. 9 Bidding of Projects 9.1 HCD assists the Owner in the selection of the Contractor through a bidding process. The Contractor who is selected will enter into a Contract with the Owner. 9.2 The Bid Documents will be distributed to eligible Bidders from the Rotating Contractors List. Bid Documents will include: Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders Bid Form Scope of Work - by reference the HCD Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors are part of every project. 9.3 Minor repair projects under $10,000 and emergency work will not be subject to bid rules. Emergency and minor repairs may not be sent out to bid due to the nature of the work or size of the project. The next Contractor (or two depending on the size of the project) on the Rotating Contractor List may be called to provide a Proposal for emergency repair work or minor repairs and will be required to respond in a timely manner. The quote provided must be within the acceptable bid range to be accepted. If a Contractor is not able to be contacted or is unavailable to respond the next Contractor on the list will be contacted. 10 Prebid Meeting 10.1 All bidders are required to attend the mandatory Prebid Meeting at the site. The purpose of the Prebid Meeting is to walk through the project site, review the scope of work and solicit questions from the Bidders relative to the scope, purpose, nature, and extent of the work. This walk-through also provides

10 General Conditions an opportunity for Contractors to examine site conditions, which may affect the work and take measurements necessary to quantify Bids If the Contractor cannot attend the Prebid meeting, provide written notification to the HCD Program Manager within 48 hours of receipt of the Invitation to Bid, to allow HCD staff the opportunity to invite additional Bidders Failure to attend Prebid meetings and/or submit Bids will result in increases in the number of Bidders invited to submit Bids on future projects; as well as, a suspension of active status and/or termination from the Rotating Contractor List for repeat offenders. 11 Scope of Work 11.1 Bidders will be provided with a Scope of Work which lists and/or describes the Work to be undertaken. The Scope of Work is keyed to the HCD Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors The HCD Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors is incorporated, in its entirety by reference, into all Scopes of Work and the Contractor s request to be placed on the Rotating Contractor List is an acknowledgement of this inclusion Not all specifications sections will apply to every project since all projects will not likely contain all types of Work specified Supplemental Bid Information may be provided when the HCD Program Manager determines the Scope of Work is insufficient in clarity to obtain a responsible bid Contractors are cautioned that all Specifications and materials referenced in this manual are to be used without exception, unless otherwise noted in writing, Supplemental Bid Information, or Addenda For projects where floor plans or other drawings may be provided, it should be noted that the drawings are for illustrative purposes and may not show all work required, exact dimensions, or construction details. The Contractor maintains sole responsibility for quantity calculations and dimension verification For complete reconstruction of a home or new home construction, the HCD will provide plans from an Architect, licensed in the State of Florida or include the development of the drawings as a line item of the Scope of Work Bidders have the responsibility to verify all dimensions and quantities prior to submittal of bids Contractors shall verify all dimensions on plans related to Work in the field during construction Identify Scope of Work questions or requests for additional information at the Prebid meeting and/or submit them in writing, to the HCD Program Manager, within 24 hours following the Prebid meeting. Responses to questions and clarifications shall be provided to all Bidders, in writing by Addenda to be incorporated into the Work The intent of the Contract Documents is to identify performance requirements, materials, and expectations for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The organization and/or arrangement of the Contract Documents have no bearing on how the Contractor chooses to divide the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade Words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings, unless otherwise indicated In the interest of brevity, the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying works such as all and any and articles such as the and an, but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of the statement.

11 General Conditions Bids and Proposals 12.1 Submittal of a Bid shall constitute an acknowledgement by the Contractor that he/she has thoroughly examined the job site and is familiar with the Scope of Work, the HCD Rules, Regulations and Specifications for Contractors, and Supplemental Bid Information and Addenda, if any All bids must be itemized, using the Scope of Work write up as the basis for itemization. The itemization total is to be transcribed onto the Bid Form which will be used as the basis for awarding the Bid. If the itemization and the Bid Form price listed differ, the Bid Form will prevail Once a Contractor is selected, he/she must accept and complete the project for the cost that was Bid. See Article Mathematical errors, omissions, or other mistakes made by the Contractor, will not preclude a Contractor from honoring the bid Bid submissions must include all required information, including but not limited to: Bid Price, Unit Prices requested, Subcontractor information requested, Subcontractor credentials requested, Product data requested, etc. All bids and bidders must be responsive and responsible. Failure to submit all documents can void your Bid. See Article The HCD Program Manager reserves the right to reject any or all bids for failure to be responsive or responsible Bid Shopping or Chiseling is considered to be unethical and is not considered an acceptable practice. 13 Bid Selection 13.1 All bids must be sealed, and delivered to the HCD office no later than the specified time and date listed on the Invitation to Bid. The envelope of the sealed bid shall be labeled Sealed Bid and also indicate the Bidder s Name, Project Address, and Bid Date. Only the Bid for the specific project should be included in the sealed envelope The bid will be awarded to the lowest responsible bidder that is within the acceptable bid range of 10% above and below the HCD in-house estimate If none of the bids are within the acceptable bid range, the HCD Program Manager reserves the right to choose the lowest responsible bidder, or to have the project sent out for rebid The winning Contractor must be approved by the Owner. If the Owner disapproves of the winning Contractor, the HCD Program Manager shall award the bid to the second lowest responsible bidder, provided the Bid falls within the acceptable bid range The Owner has a right to request the use of a specific Contractor; however the Contractor must meet all criteria of those accepted to the Rotating Contractor List, must bid the project, and be the lowest responsible bidder. 14 Bid Protests 14.1 Only a contractor who has submitted a bid proposal for a specific project to the HCD will have standing to protest that specific bid All bid protests shall be submitted in writing to the HCD Program Manager within two (2) business days of date of receipt of bid results The HCD Program Manager will review any and all bid protests The HCD Program Manager will make a determination within three (3) working days on the results of the Bid Protest in writing.

12 General Conditions After the determination by the HCD Program Manager has been rendered, if the Contractor still has concerns about the methodology of the bid process, the Contractor may appeal the protest to the HCD Director within three (3) working days The HCD Director will have three (3) working days to respond to the appeal. The HCD Director s response will serve as the final determination. 15 Respect of Person and Property 15.1 The Contractor is required to give the Owner at least one day (24 hour) notice when scheduling appointments to visit a home, except in the case of emergency assistance or repair The Contractor shall be respectful and courteous to the Owner at all times. If issues develop that need resolution, the Contractor is to call the HCD personnel assigned to that project and inform them of the situation Contractors and their agents/employees, including Subcontractors, are not to drive on unpaved property without written consent from the Owner The residence must be cleaned of all construction and/or demolition debris on a daily basis. Debris must be removed from the property on a daily basis or placed in an appropriate refuse container and upon completion of the job All jobs must be left broom clean each day No unsafe conditions shall be left overnight. 16 Contractor Requirements 16.1 Workmanship shall be of the highest quality The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and maintain sole responsibility for, and control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the work under the Contract and comply with all federal state and local Building Codes The Contractor shall supervise and direct all Work including the inspections of work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work The Contractor shall coordinate site access and confine operations at the site to areas approved by the Owner complying with all applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities having jurisdiction The Contractor is responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. Furthermore, the Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected for failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work shall be at the Contractor s expense Quality assurance inspections will be performed by designated HCD personnel If work is deemed unsatisfactory by the designated HCD personnel, the Contractor will be given ten (10) calendar days to make corrections to the work If corrections are not made within the prescribed time without good reason (i.e. weather delays, Acts of God, etc ), the Contractor may be subject to termination from the job, suspension from bidding on new projects, and/or removal from the Rotating Contractor List.

13 General Conditions An issue that is considered to be a hazard shall be made safe immediately upon notification by HCD personnel, Permitting Services Division, Code Enforcement, or any other City Department and then corrected within twenty-four (24) hours Contractor maintains sole responsibility for coordination and scheduling of work to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. Once construction begins at a site, the Contractor is expected to maintain a continuous and earnest presence to complete the project in a timely manner without extensive delays and/or work stoppages Provide means, methods, and facilities to prevent rodents, pests, and insects from accessing or invading premises due to construction activities Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 17 Building Codes and Permits 17.1 All work shall be done in accordance with federal, state, and local laws, regulations, ordinances, and codes, as interpreted by the Permitting Services Division The Contractor is responsible for securing and paying for all required building permits as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by governmental agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required prior to starting construction operations A copy of the permit must be verifiable by the HCD personnel prior to the commencement of work A copy of the permit shall be placed at the construction site in accordance with the requirements of the Permitting Services Division. 18 Notice of Commencement 18.1 Designated HCD personnel will provide the Contractor with the required Notice of Commencement The Contractor will submit the Notice of Commencement to the Permitting Services Division along with the Permit application(s). 19 Commencement of Work 19.1 Designated HCD personnel will send a Notice to Proceed to the Contractor The Contractor must begin work within seven (7) calendar days of the date the Notice to Proceed was issued, except in the case of emergency work or inclement weather where the work should begin immediately The Contractor must provide a schedule for the Work within ten (10) calendar days of the date the Notice to Proceed was issued Contractor will contact the designated HCD personnel upon commencement of each of the following stages of work, as applicable: New construction Pre-foundation concrete pour After framing Prior to covering mechanical, electrical or plumbing work After drywall texture, if any At the time interior/exterior painting is scheduled After final inspection by the Permitting Services Division

14 General Conditions Rehabilitation On the date of move out by Owner, if applicable. Prior to covering mechanical, electrical or plumbing work After drywall texture, if any At the time interior/exterior painting is scheduled After cabinets are installed Prior to covering structural repairs After final inspection by the Permitting Services Division Roof work After tear off/prior to dry in After secondary vapor barrier installation After final inspection by Permitting Services Division 20 Contractor Identification 20.1 Contractors will be required to provide identification badges for their representatives working on HCD projects. If an individual can not verify that they are working for the Contractor responsible for that specific project, then they may be asked to leave the premises If an individual does not leave a job site when asked to do so they will be subject to prosecution to the fullest extent of the law. 21 Progress Inspections 21.1 The Contractor shall provide a lock box, as necessary and approved by the Owner, for the Building Inspector and the HCD personnel to access on all HCD projects The Contractor shall facilitate inspection of the Work during normal working hours by authorized Building Inspectors All work shall be subject to review by the Building Inspector and designated HCD personnel The designated HCD personnel shall be notified of the work that will be inaccessible at specific stages of the work and before the completion of work. All required inspections by the Building Inspector must be completed prior to cover up. Contractor maintains sole responsibility for contacting and obtaining Building Inspector inspections and shall perform and pay for remedial measures, if necessary Contractor shall notify the designated HCD personnel of any work, material and/or condition that he/she may not be able to verify by visual inspection. 22 Change Orders 22.1 Jobs should be bid and completed with no change orders Change orders will only be allowed when unforeseen conditions are encountered that could not be initially evaluated The Contractor shall not proceed with a change to the Scope of Work without written authorization from the HCD Program Manager or a fully executed Change Order Changes in the scope of work or workmanship that are inconsistent with the HCD Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors, Scope of Work, and Contract Documents shall be submitted in writing by the Contractor, prior to commencement of work, with any cost adjustments to the authorized HCD personnel Include time extension requests with Change Orders; otherwise, no additional time will be granted.

15 General Conditions The HCD Program Manager reserves the right to solicit bids from other Contractors for any Change Order(s) or changes in the Scope of Work, workmanship, or materials. 23 Incidental Items 23.1 Items not mentioned in the Scope of Work or Contract Documents that can be reasonably and legitimately inferred to be necessary to complete the Work shall be furnished and installed as though specified in every detail. 24 Security 24.1 The Contractor is responsible for the security and protection of Owner s property while on the premises and will ensure that the property is locked, secure and safe The Contractor maintains sole responsibility for the security of project materials, equipment and/or tools utilized on the project and safety of construction personnel, Owner and their guests, and HCD staff when at the project site. 25 Loss or Damage of Work 25.1 The Contractor is responsible for any loss or damage to the Work until the time of final acceptance by HCD and Owner Contractor is responsible for any loss or damage to property as a result of construction activity, staging, material storage, negligence, etc Any loss or damage shall be covered by the Contractor s insurance policy. 26 Correction of Work 26.1 Any work that is found to not conform to the project specifications or is deemed unsatisfactory by the HCD personnel shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to correct The Contractor will have fourteen (14) calendar days from the date of written notification from the Housing Development Program Manager to make corrections to the work If the Contractor fails to make corrections to the work within fourteen (14) calendar days the HCD has the right to have the work corrected and charge the Contractor the cost to correct the work including penalties and interest The cost to correct the work will be deducted from the amount that is remaining to be paid for incomplete work or retained under Article 30 Retainage If the cost to correct is greater than the project balance and/or the retainage, the contractor will be charged directly for the difference. 27 Completion of Work 27.1 Time is of the essence on all projects. All work shall be satisfactorily completed within the specified time period as detailed in the Contract Work days for rehabilitation and reconstruction projects are based on the bid amount, rounded to the next thousand, and multiplied by 2 calendar days per thousand dollars, unless otherwise indicated. Contractors shall be held accountable for delays due to Contractor performance If the Contractor does not complete the work within the time frame specified in the work contract, the Contractor will be responsible for the lodging costs of the Owner beyond the contract completion date, if relocation of the Owner was part of the project.

16 General Conditions The Contractor agrees that $ may be withheld from the amount to be paid the Contractor for each day that the work is not completed past the scheduled completion date, as liquidated damages Contractor will not be responsible for additional lodging or liquidated damages if the delay is caused by circumstances beyond the Contractor s control (i.e. inclement weather, Acts of God, etc ) as determined by the HCD Program Manager, subject to timely notification pursuant to Any and all anticipated or actual weather and/or material delays must be documented and submitted to the Rehabilitation Specialist within 10 days of occurrence for review and HCD Program Manager s approval regarding extension of contract time Upon completion of the project, the Contractor will instruct the Owner on how to use and maintain all installed fixtures, appliances, air conditioning systems, smoke detectors, etc 27.8 The Contractor will explain all warranties and give documentation of warranties to the Owner The Contractor will provide the Owner and the HCD with a list of all Subcontractors used to install major components (e.g., mechanical, electrical, plumbing, roofing, etc.). 28 Warranty 28.1 See Section for warranty requirements In the event corrections are not made within the required time limit or the Contractor disregards requests for warranty work from the Owner or the Warranty Program, the HCD Program Manager reserves the right to Suspend the Contractor s active status and/or Terminate the Contractor from the Rotating Contractor List. See Articles 6 and 8, respectively. 29 Billing and Payments 29.1 The Contractor shall submit all pay requests to designated HCD personnel In order to process a partial payment request, a partial payment request affidavit and release of liens must be submitted to the HCD with a computer generated or typed invoice. Each invoice must include date, project name, payment amount, unique identification number, identification of payee, etc For rehabilitation projects, a partial pay request may be turned in after 50% of the work has been completed and inspected by the Rehabilitation Specialist. The partial payment dollar amount will not exceed 50% of the original Bid job cost. The remaining 50% and Change Order(s) cost(s) may be billed at Project Completion after the Rehabilitation Specialist has confirmed that the Punch List is complete, signed by the Owner, and all Building Permit Inspections are complete. For new construction, reconstruction, and/or multi-family type projects, a partial pay requests are to be submitted monthly. Retainage of 10%, cumulative, will be withheld and paid after completion of punch list and submission of close out documentation In order to process a final payment request, the following documents must be submitted with a computer generated or typed invoice: Final payment request affidavit Release of liens Warranties Completed punch list Certificate of Occupancy or Certificate of Final Completion 29.5 No funds will be disbursed for payment until all required inspections and final approvals have been obtained from the Permitting Services Division and the HCD.

17 General Conditions Final payment does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of obtaining final inspections, Certificate of Final Completion, or a Certificate of Occupancy from the Permitting Services Division The Owner shall sign an authorization for all payments in the presence of designated HCD staff If the Owner is not available or refuses to sign the authorization for final payment when the work was completed satisfactorily, the HCD Program Manager, Division Manager, and/or Director are deemed authorized to approve payment. 30 Retainage 30.1 A minimum of ten percent (10%) of the total job cost will be retained on all new construction, reconstruction, and/or multi-family type projects until the project is complete Retainage on a project will be released when the punch list work is complete and is signed and approved by the Owner and designated HCD personnel and all project closeout documentation is submitted. Designated HCD personnel must be present when the Owner signs the Punch List and Final Pay Request. 31 Subcontractors 31.1 When Subcontractors are employed, they shall be bound by the terms and conditions of the HCD s Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors insofar as it applies to their work. The Contractor maintains full responsibility for proper completion of all work executed pursuant to these guidelines Subcontractors shall be used where the experience and expertise of that specific trade is necessary or required by building codes and regulations (Plumbing, Electrical, HVAC, Roofing, etc ) The Contractor is required to prepare a list of all Subcontractors, including contact information, and provide that list to the designated HCD personnel prior to the start of construction and to the Owner upon completion of the project All Subcontractors are required to have all necessary licenses, insurance, and certifications in order to perform work under Contractors providing services under the HCD housing assistance programs The Contractor is responsible for all persons and Subcontractors under their direction. 32 Contractor Evaluations 32.1 The Owner and/or the designated HCD personnel have the option to fill out a Contractor evaluation at the end of each job to be entered into the Contractor file. A copy will be provided to the Contractor The Contractor evaluation can be utilized to monitor Contractor performance See Articles 6 and 8 regarding suspension and termination, respectively. 33 Disputes 33.1 Disputes with regard to payment or construction activities under a program sponsored by the HCD will be handled within the HCD and Legal Department or the court system depending on the program involved Any dispute relating to payment or construction activities or project specifications must be in writing and delivered to the HCD Program Manager by certified mail within five (5) business days of the onset of the dispute Any dispute involving project specifications will be handled directly through the HCD Program Manager Any dispute between the Contractor and the Owner must be resolved between those parties.

18 General Conditions Governmental Requirements 34.1 The HCD housing assistance programs are funded by the Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) and the State of Florida through the following programs: Community Development Block Grant (CDBG) Home Investment Partnership (HOME) or Florida Housing Finance Corporation through the State Housing Initiatives Partnership (SHIP) 34.2 The HCD s Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors are consistent with federal, state, and local programs In instances where federal funding is utilized, Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) shall be consulted for operation, suspension and debarment In instances where federal funding is utilized, Davis-Bacon wage rates may be required which will be identified in the bid documents. 35 Standards 35.1 While the HCD endeavors to promulgate Standards that are accurate and non-restrictive for bidding purposes, we may reference an item by manufacturer s name and number for demonstration and/or performance purposes The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, permits, drawings (if needed), and services for the proper completion of the project as outlined in the Scope of Work, according to the HCD Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors and Contract Documents. END OF SECTION

19 Invitation to Bid & Instructions to Bidders Date: To: INVITATION TO BID & INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS You are invited to submit a bid, under seal, on the following project: Project Location:, Orlando, FL Owner: Project Description: Work on this project includes rehabilitation of an Owner Occupied residence including but not limited to. Bid Documents are being provided to the invited firms from the HCD Contractor Rotation List for their use in developing Bids. The Bid Documents are intended to represent items of a quality level known to meet the City s requirements. While the City endeavors to promulgate written specifications that are accurate and non-restrictive for bidding purposes, they may also reference an item by manufacturer s name and number. Bidders are cautioned that all items quoted must be in compliance with the Bid Documents, including but not limited to the Scope of Work write up, any Addenda issued, and the current issue of the Rules Regulations Specifications for Contractors. If you are taking exception, indicate those exceptions on company letterhead and attach to your Bid. All Bids must include an itemized bid list. PRE-BID CONFERENCE All bidders must have representation at the Mandatory Pre-Bid Walk-Through at the above Project Location on at. The purpose of the Pre-Bid Conference is to provide and solicit information relative to the scope, purpose, nature and extent of the work, and any local conditions, which may affect the work and its performance. Submission of a Bid shall constitute an acknowledgment by the bidder that he / she has thoroughly examined and is familiar with the proposed Work. The failure or neglect of a bidder to examine the site(s) of the Work shall in no way relieve him / her of any obligations with respect to his / her Bid. No claim for additional compensation will be allowed which is based upon a lack of knowledge of the Scope of Work, Bid Documents, or upon a lack of a reasonable knowledge gained through examination of the work site. BID DATE Bids, signed and under seal, executed, and dated will be received at the HCD office, City Hall, 7 th Floor, 400 S Orange Avenue, Orlando, Florida, before 11:00 am, local prevailing time, on the day of, Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time prescribed. Submit your Bid on the Bid Form provided. Submit Bids in a sealed envelope with the Project Location, Owner, Bid Date, acknowledgement of Addenda (if any) received, clearly identified on the exterior of the envelope. A faxed or electronically transmitted Bid will not be accepted. Bids are required to be submitted under a condition of irrevocability for a period of 60 days after submission. Submit required supplemental Bid information, including but not limited to Roofing Subcontractor and product information, Unit Prices, and Suspension and Debarment Certification with the Bid. Bidders are responsible for verification that HCD personnel have current copies of Contractor s Certificates of Insurance. Bids are by invitation only. Bids from unsolicited bidders will be returned. Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain mathematical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind may be declared unacceptable.

20 Invitation to Bid & Instructions to Bidders CHANGES IN THE WORK If, during the course of work, the Contractor encounters unforeseen conditions which impact the Work and which could not initially be evaluated, the Contractor shall not proceed without written authorization of the designated HCD personnel. Substitutions of materials, changes in the Scope of Work, or workmanship required by these changes, which may be proposed by the Contractor, or found necessary or desirable as the Work progresses, shall be in writing with price change given, and approved by the Owner and HCD personnel prior to implementation. INSURANCE Insurance coverage required by the HCD must be in force throughout the Contract term. Should a Contractor fail to provide acceptable evidence of current insurance within seven (7) calendar days prior to the expiration date of an insurance policy or at any time during the contract term, the City shall have the absolute right to terminate the contract without any further obligation to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be liable for the entire additional cost of performing the incomplete portion of the contract at the time of termination. END OF INVITATION TO BID AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

21 Bid Form BID FORM To: For: Date:, (HCD), City Hall, 7 th Floor, 400 S Orange Avenue, Orlando, Florida Rehabilitation project at Orlando, Florida, for, Owner. (Bid Time & Date: 11:00 am on 00/00/00) (bidder to enter submission date) Submitted By: (bidder to enter name, address, and contact information) Bidder s Company Name: Bidder s Company Address: Bidder s Phone # and Offer: Having examined the Place of the Work and all matters referred to in the Invitation to Bid & Instruction to Bidders, and Bid Documents provided by HCD for the above mentioned project, we, the undersigned, hereby offer to enter into a Contract to perform the Work for the Sum of: Dollars ($ ), in lawful money of the United States of America. Bid Sum includes all labor, materials, equipment and any other items, facilities and services, without exception for the proper execution and completion of the Contract, and if awarded a Contract for the Work will complete the Work within time limits as specified. All applicable federal, state, and local taxes are included in the Bid Sum. We acknowledge that the Owner and HCD reserve the right to charge the Contractor liquidated damages in the amount of $ per calendar day, for each day the project has not been completed as stipulated in the signed Owner / Contractor Agreement. This offer shall be open to acceptance and is irrevocable for sixty (60) days from the bid closing date. If this bid is accepted within the period stated above, we will: o Enter into an Agreement with the Owner for the Work, o o Attend a pre-construction / closing meeting at City Hall for the purposes of Contracting, Commence the Work within ten calendar days after issuance of the written Notice to Proceed of this bid. Bid Supplements: The following Supplements are attached to this Bid Form and are considered an integral part of this Bid Form: Construction cost breakdown, using Scope of Work write up. Identification of the Roofing Contractor / Subcontractor. Product information on the roofing material to be installed. Product information on the replacement plumbing fixtures. Suspension and Debarment Certification

22 Bid Form Addenda: The following Addenda have been received. The Work referenced in the Addenda has been incorporated into the Bid Documents and all costs are included in the Bid Sum. Addendum #, dated. Addendum #, dated. Unit Prices: The following are Unit Prices for specific portions of the Work as listed: Roof decking replacement Per Square Foot - $ o Replacement of 10% of the roof area is included in the Bid. Fascia replacement Per Lineal Foot - $ o Twenty (20) lineal feet of fascia replacement is included in the Bid. Soffit replacement Per Square Foot - $ o Fifteen (15) square feet of soffit replacement is included in the Bid. Wood rafter / joist replacement Each - $ o Replacement of one (1) joist is included in the Bid. Wood wall stud replacement Per Lineal Foot - $ o Sixteen (16) lineal feet of wall stud replacement is included in the Bid. Drywall replacement Per Square Foot - $ o Twenty five (25) square feet of drywall replacement is included in the Bid. Bid Form Signature(s): Company Name: Partner / Witness Authorized Signature: (print name) (print name) Title: Instructions for execution: If the firm is a partnership, all members of the partnership must execute. If the firm is a corporation, the president must sign, the secretary must witness and the seal of the corporation must be affixed. If the firm operates as a sole proprietorship, the proprietor must execute. END OF BID FORM

23 Suspension and Debarment Certification Suspension and Debarment Certification The, (HCD) prohibits contracting with or making sub-awards to parties suspended, debarred, or whose principals are suspended or debarred by Federal or State department or agency. By signing and submitting this certification the Contractor certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief that it and its principals: 1. Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by and Federal, State, or local department or agency; 2. Have not within a three-year period preceding this application been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State, or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property. 3. Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity (Federal, State, or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in item (2) of this certification; 4. Have not within a three-year period preceding this application had one or more public transactions (Federal, State, or local) terminated for cause or default; 5. That this certification, titled Suspension and Debarment Certification will be included without modification, in all subcontracts for the project; and 6. Shall not knowingly enter into any subcontract with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal, State, or local department or agency. Do you anticipate having subcontractors under this proposed contract? Yes No The Contractor shall provide immediate written notice to the HCD Program Manager to whom this certification is submitted if at any time the Contractor learns that the certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. Where the Contractor is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, attach a written explanation. Vendor s Name: Signature of Authorized Representative: Date: Printed Name & Title of Authorized Representative: This document must be fully executed and submitted with every bid. END OF SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION

24 Agreement, General Conditions, and Forms SECTION AGREEMENT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, & FORMS Part 1 General 1.1 Contractor is responsible for familiarizing themselves with all Agreements, General Conditions, and Forms referenced in the Contract Documents. 1.2 Agreement and Conditions of the Contract A. The Agreement form is a, (HCD) Housing Rehabilitation Work Contract. 1. An example copy of the Housing Rehabilitation Work Contract is attached in Section B. See Section of the HCD s Rules, Regulations, and Specifications for Contractors for the General Conditions for the s (HCD) program and Housing Rehabilitation Work Contract. 1.3 Forms A. Additional Forms required to be submitted as a part of the project are identified in individual specification sections. Part 2 Products Not Used Part 3 Execution Not Used END OF SECTION

25 Price and Payment Procedures SECTION PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for Payment. B. Documentation of proposed changes in Scope of Work, Contract Sum, and Contract Time. 1.2 Schedule of Values A. Submit a printed Schedule of Values that accurately reflects the fair market value of the Scope of Work. 1. The Schedule of Values must, at a minimum, be broken down in the same format as the Scope of Work for HCD Owner Occupied rehabilitation projects and Reconstruction Projects. 2. The Schedule of Values for Rental and Multi-family rehabilitation projects and New Construction must be submitted for HCD approval prior to signing construction contracts and shall indicate each item of work, using project specific specifications as the basis for the breakdown. B. Revise the Schedule of Values to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment. C. For Unit Price work, identify quantities taken from the Contract Documents multiplied by the contracted unit price to achieve the total for the item. 1.3 Applications for Payments A. Unless otherwise agreed, in writing, Application(s) for Payment shall be made in the following manner, based on the project type: 1. Owner Occupied rehabilitation projects may submit a partial Application for Payment when 50% of the Scope of Work has been completed and a final Application for Payment when the project is 100% complete. a. A partial payment at 50% complete shall not exceed 50% of the project cost, even when actual work completed exceeds the 50% complete. b. A final payment at 100% complete shall not be processed for payment until all work has been reviewed by HCD Staff, Owner agrees and signs that work is complete, a Certificate of Completion from Building Permits is provided by the Contractor, and all punch list items are complete. 2. New Construction, Reconstruction, and Rental or Multi-family projects may bill monthly based on the percentage complete of each line item on the HCD approved Schedule of Values, less 10% retainage. a. 10% project retainage will be held until project is 100% complete including but not limited to all punch list work, Certificate of Occupancy / Completion is provided, and all utilities and equipment are operational. B. The Contractor shall submit complete Applications for Payment packages to HCD office via mail, courier, hand delivery or . A complete Application for Payment package includes the following: 1. An invoice, dated no earlier than the submission date of all documentation and with a unique invoice reference number. Subsequent invoices shall be sequentially numbered. 2. Request for Payment - See Section of the Specifications. 3. Application for Payment HCD preference is AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 Continuation Sheet; however, approved Contractor s electronic media driven forms providing the same information, or approved substitution may be approved. 4. Contractor s Payment Affidavit and Release of Liens See Section of these specifications. 5. Final Application for Payment must also include the following: a. Owner Authorization See Section of these specifications. b. Warranty Acknowledgement See Section of these specifications. c. Project Warranty(s) See Section of these specifications. 1. Provide original warranty to Owner and copy to HCD with final Application for Payment. C. Present required information in typewritten form.

26 Price and Payment Procedures D. Include cost for installed materials only. Stored materials, on-site or off-site, will not be authorized for payment without prior approval. E. When HCD personnel require substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. 1.4 Proposed Contract Modifications A. Any proposed contract modification must be completed through a Change Order. See Section of these specifications for the Change Order form. B. Contractor must submit a proposed Change Order with the following information for evaluation: 1. Quantities of materials and the cost thereof including shipping to the site. 2. Labor and/or hourly cost including payroll taxes, insurance, and benefits for each skill or labor classification. 3. Quantities and costs of equipment, tools, and other material not incorporated into the work. 4. Overhead and profit. 5. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 6. Credit for deletions from Contract. 7. Other information requested by HCD personnel required to evaluate the proposed Change Order. C. Change Orders must be fully approved and executed prior to completion of the referenced work. Part 2 Part 3 Products Not Used Execution Not Used END OF SECTION

27 Request for Payment Form REQUEST FOR PAYMENT Partial <circle one> Final To: From: Project: Invoice #: Contractor: Contact: (HCD), Property Owner (Insert Name of Property Owner) (Insert Project Address) (Insert Name and Address) (Insert Telephone Number and Address) I certify that % of the rehabilitation / construction work on the above reference Project has been completed according to the Contract Documents and Agreements as indicated on the attached Application for Payment. Said work consists of: 1. Original Contract Sum: $ 2. Net Changes by Change Order(s) $ 3. Contract Sum to Date (line 1 plus line 2) $ 4. Total Completed to Date $ 5. Retainage of Completed Work (10% of line 4) $ 6. Total Less Retainage (line 4 minus line 5) $ 7. Previous Payments (line 6 from previous pay applications) $ 8. Current Payment Due (line 6 minus line 7) $ 9. Balance to Finish, including Retainage (line 3 minus line 6) $ I have reviewed the Contract Sum and Change Orders, if any, and certify that the Current Payment Due is correct. Signature of Contractor or Representative / Date I assume all responsibility for, and agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless the, its elected and appointed officials, officers, agents, boards, and employees from and against any and all claims, demands, suits, actions, judgments, costs and expenses (including without limitation, reasonable attorneys fees including all those incurred in all trial and appellate actions) in connection with, brought or obtained from or in connection with all activities undertaken or related to the HCD Rehabilitation Program, or my part or behalf in the performance of any covenant or agreement to be performed pursuant to the Project which is the subject of this document, and from any negligent or intentional acts by me or any use, misuse, abuse, neglect, or failure to exercise due care in, or about the property which is the subject of this document, including without limitation my failure to keep the property in a safe condition. I understand the city of Orlando is assisting with financing only and makes no warranty with regard to the Work and shall not be responsible for any errors or deficiencies related to the Work, should any occur.

28 Request for Payment Form I hereby request that the, issue payment to the Contractor in the amount of: $ (line 8 from above) Signature of Property Owner / Date (Must be signed in presence of authorized HCD personnel) I certify that I inspected the above referenced project and find that the Contractor has completed % of the required rehabilitation Work according to the Contract Documents. Rehabilitation Specialist / Date Housing Program Manager / Date END OF REQUEST FOR PAYMENT FORM

29 Contractor s Payment Affidavit and Release of Liens CONTRACTOR S PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT AND RELEASE OF LIENS PARTIAL < circle one > FINAL STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF ORANGE Before me, the undersigned authority, personally appeared (name), who, after being first duly sworn, deposes and says of his or her personal knowledge the following: 1. He or she is the (title) of (business), which does business in the State of Florida, hereinafter referred to as the Contractor. 2. Contractor, pursuant to the Housing Rehabilitation Work Contract ( Contract ) with (name of Owner), hereinafter referred to as the Owner, has furnished or caused to be furnished labor, materials, and services for the construction of certain improvements to real property located at (address), which is more particularly described in said Contract. 3. This affidavit is executed by the Contractor in accordance with section of the Florida Statutes for the purposes of obtaining final payment from the, who is acting solely as the lender under the City s Housing Rehabilitation Program, in the amount of $. 4. All work required under the contract has been fully completed in accordance with the terms thereof, and all lienors under the direct contract have been paid in full. There are no unpaid claims for materials, supplies, or equipment; no unpaid claims of subcontractors; and no claims of laborers or mechanics for unpaid wages arising out of the performance of the contract. 5. In consideration of final payment in the amount of $, the Contractor hereby waives and releases its lien(s) and right to claim a lien for labor, services, or materials furnished to the Owner under or by virtue of the contract. However, if for any reason, the Contractor is not paid the full amount stated herein, said deduction shall not affect the validity of this release. Signed, sealed, and delivered this day of, By: (signature) (print name) Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of, 2018, by who is personally known to me or produced as identification, and did/did not take an oath. Notary Public My Commission Expires: END OF CONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT AND RELEASE OF LIENS Department Housing and Community Development

30 Owner Authorization OWNER AUTHORIZATION (Final Payment) 1. I hereby certify that the work performed under the Housing Rehabilitation Work Contract, dated, on real property located at has been completed in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents for said project. 2. I understand that the work performed by (business), hereinafter referred to as the Contractor, carries a one (1) year Warranty, (five (5) year Warranty on new roofing) beginning from the date final payment is issued. 3. Furthermore, a 2-10 Home Buyers Warranty has also been provided on this Project. 4. I understand that in the event that any defect in workmanship or materials is detected within the warranty period, I must contact the Contractor directly at his place of business located at (address) (phone) ( ). 5. Furthermore, all warranty issues must be reported to the 2-10 Home Buyers Warranty immediately, even if the Contractor has been notified. 6. I have been informed and trained by the Contractor on how to use and maintain the following: Appliances HVAC Plumbing Fixtures Windows / Doors Smoke Detectors Other (please specify below) 7. The Contractor has explained the Warranty(s) to me and I have received the original Warranty(s) from the Contractor. 8. I assume all responsibility for, and agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless the, its elected and appointed officials, officers, agents, boards and employees, from and against any and all claims, demands, suits, actions, judgments, costs and expenses (including without limitation, reasonable attorneys fees including all those incurred in all trial and appellate actions) in connections with, brought or obtained, or arising from or in connection with all activities undertaken or related to the HCD Rehabilitation Program, or my part or behalf in the performance of any covenant or agreement to be performed pursuant to the project which is the subject of this document, and from any negligent or intentional acts by me or any agent, contractor, servant, or employee of min in or about the property which is the subject of this document, and from all liability and loss on account of damages to persons or property arising out of any use, misuse, abuse, neglect, or failure to exercise due care in, or about the property which is the subject of this document, including without limitation my failure to keep the property in a safe condition. 9. I understand the is assisting with financing only and makes no warranty with regard to the Work and shall not be responsible for any errors or deficiencies related to the Work, should any occur. 10. I hereby request the, (HCD) issue final payment to the Contractor. Signature of Property Owner / Date (Must be signed in presence of authorized HCD personnel) TO BE COMPLETED BY HCD PERSONNEL I certify that the above-referenced project has been inspected and find that the Contractor has completed the work required in accordance with the Contract Documents. I further certify that the Contractor has provided the City with the required documentation for payment, and has provided the City with the required executed Contractor s Payment Affidavit and Release of Liens. Rehabilitation Specialist / Date Housing Program Manager / Date END OF OWNER S AUTHORIZATION

31 Warranty Acknowledgement WARRANTY ACKNOWLEDGEMENT To: Subject: Address: Owner:, Housing and Community Development (HCD) Warranty for Work (insert project address) (insert name) Pursuant to the Contract Documents and our Rehabilitation Work Contract, dated (insert date), with the Owner listed above, (insert company name) hereby acknowledges and advises HCD that the Contractor s and / or Roofing Warranty(s) has / have been provided and explained to the Owner for the project at the address above. In connection with the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents, you are advised that I warrant that all materials, fixtures and equipment furnished by my Subcontractors and me were new and of good quality and of good title. Should any defects appear within one (1) year (five (5) years on roofing work), from the date of the issuance of final payment, caused by faulty materials, fixtures, equipment or work, I shall remedy defects and pay for any damage to other work resulting there from. Furthermore, a 2-10 Home Buyers Warranty has been purchased for the Work completed. The Owner is obligated to give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness to the Contractor and the 2-10 Home Buyers Warranty program. A copy of separate Warranty(s), provided to the Owner, is attached for those facilities specified to be warranted in the Contract Documents. Contractor Signature (print name) Date Contractor Company Name Street Address City, State, Zip Code Phone Number Address Instructions for execution: Print on Contractor s Letterhead. END OF WARRANTY ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

32 Change Order CHANGE ORDER # Owner: Project: Contractor: Phone: Item Description Cost $ Total Change Order Amount: $ This Change Order, upon execution, becomes a part of the Contract Documents, subject to the contract stipulations and covenants. The parties have hereunto set their signatures: Contractor Signature / Date Property Owner Signature / Date (Must be signed in presence of authorized HCD personnel) TO BE COMPLETED BY HCD PERSONNEL I certify that the above-referenced changes in the Work are necessary and based on the original Bid Documents, find that the Contractor has justification for the Change Order. Housing Rehabilitation Specialist / Date Housing Program Manager / Date END OF CHANGE ORDER

33 Unit Prices SECTION UNIT PRICES Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to Work performed under a unit price payment method. B. Defect assessment and non-payment for rejected work. 1.2 Cost Included A. Unit Prices required to be included on the Bid Form shall include full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation services and incidentals; erection, applications and/or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. 1.3 Unit Quantities Specified A. Quantities indicated in the Contract Documents to be included in the Bid are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements of actual Work will determine the payment amount. 1.4 Measurement of Quantities A. Measurement methods delineated in individual specification sections compliment the criteria of this section. B. Take all measurements and compute quantities. Measurements and quantities will be verified by HCD personnel or through photographic documentation submitted by the Contractor. C. Measurements by Volume are measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height or thickness. D. Measurements by Area are measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. E. Linear Measurement is measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. 1.5 Payment A. Payment for Work governed by Unit Prices will be made based on the actual measurements and quantities of Work that is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work and accepted by the responsible HCD personnel, multiplied by the Unit Price. B. Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before and after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected Products. 1.6 Defect Assessment A. Replace Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. The Individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. Part 2 Products Not Used Part 3 Execution 3.1 Unit Price Schedule A. See the Bid Form and Scope of Work for extent of Unit Prices required to be submitted. END OF SECTION

34 Administrative Requirements SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Preconstruction / Contracting Meeting. B. Progress Meetings. C. Construction Schedule. D. Procedural requirements for submittals for review, information, and project close out. 1.2 Submittals A. Submittals required with Bids will be outlined in the individual project Construction Documents. Failure to submit required Bid submittal information may void Bid. B. The Contractor must provide submittals requiring Owner selection at the time of the Preconstruction Meeting if product manufacturer differs from HCD specified materials. Submission must include completed Post-Bid Substitution form. C. Material submittals required for specified products in individual specification sections must be submitted and approved by HCD prior to ordering, purchasing, and/or installation. Part 2 Products Not Used Part 3 Execution 3.1 Preconstruction / Contracting Meeting A. HCD personnel will schedule a Preconstruction / Contracting Meeting at the HCD offices for project initiation and signing of Contracts. B. Attendance Required: 1. HCD Personnel. 2. Owner or their designated representative with signatory authority. 3. Contractor or their designated representative with signatory authority. C. Agenda 1. Scope of Work review. 2. Selection of colors and/or materials. 3. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 4. Security and housekeeping procedures. 5. Construction Schedule 6. Application for Payment procedures. 7. Owner and Contractor agreement. 3.2 Progress Meetings A. HCD personnel will review progress of project at regular intervals. B. Contractor shall notify HCD personnel when construction crew will not be working at the property. C. HCD personnel will record visual observations and note any discussions in the project file with copies provided to Owner and Contractor. 3.3 Construction Schedule A. Within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit Construction Schedule to HCD personnel. B. Coordinate Construction Schedule with Owner prior to submission to HCD. C. Submit an updated Construction Schedule with each Application for Payment or if a significant change in the proposed schedule is anticipated or develops. 3.4 Submittals for Review A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit the following information for review: B. Submittals to HCD are for limited review for the purpose of checking for conformance with information given and concept expressed in the Contract Documents. HCD s review is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of details such as dimensions and quantities, or

35 Administrative Requirements for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor. HCD s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. HCD s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. C. Contractor is responsible for determining and verifying materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, and checking and coordinating the information contained within the submittal with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. D. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection only. 3.5 Submittals for Project Close Out A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other items indicated. 3.6 Submittal Procedures A. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project and coordinate submission of related items. 1. Initial product information, shop drawings, design data, etc., can be submitted in electronic format to designated HCD personnel. a. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. 2. Submit original Warranties, Bonds, and Executed Forms to the HCD office via mail, courier, or hand delivery. a. HCD personnel will obtain Owner approval on required documents and submit a copy of final executed copy back to the Contractor. B. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. C. Submittals not requested will not be processed. END OF SECTION

36 Quality Requirements SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. References and Standards B. Mock-ups C. Control of installation D. Tolerances E. Testing and inspection services F. Survey and Field Engineering G. Manufacturer s field services 1.2 References A. ASTM C 1021 Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants B. ASTM C 1077 Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation C. ASTM C 1093 Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry D. ASTM D 3740 Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction E. ASTM E 329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing F. ASTM 543 Standard Practice for Agencies Performing nondestructive Testing 1.3 Submittals A. Testing Agency Qualifications 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. A. Test Reports After each test/inspection, promptly submit report directly to HCD personnel and to Contractor. Include the following information: 1. Date issued 2. Project title and/or number 3. Name of inspector 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection 5. Identification of product and specification section(s) 6. Location in the Project 7. Type of test / inspection 8. Date of test / inspection 9. Results of test / inspection 10. Conformance with Contract Documents 11. When requested by HCD personnel, provide interpretation of results B. Manufacturer s Field Reports Submit reports for HCD personnel and Contractor. 1. Submit reports within 7 days of observation. 1.4 References and Standards A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Contract Documents, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue specified in individual specification sections or, if none, the date current on the date of issue of the Contract Documents. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request written clarification from HCD personnel before proceeding.

37 Quality Requirements C. The contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in the Contract nor those of the HCD shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.5 Testing and Inspection Agencies For all testing (soil bearing, soil compaction, concrete, etc.), employ a certified testing company that is licensed to provide services in the State of Florida. A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and inspection. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor Employed Agency 1. Testing Agency Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 548, ASTM E 543, ASTM C 1021, ASTM C 1077, ASTM C 1093, and ASTM D 3740 as applicable to the nature of the testing. 2. Testing Equipment Calibrated at reasonable intervals by either NIST or using a NIST established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program. 1.6 Survey work and/or Field Engineering Employ a land surveyor and/or professional engineer of the discipline required and licensed in the State of Florida. Contractor shall include all costs in the Bid. A. When required by the Scope of Work, the Contractor will be responsible for survey of property as it relates to the placement of the new or re-construction. B. Elevation certification will be required when the foundation is complete. Part 2 Products Not Used Part 3 Execution 3.1 Control of Installation A. Monitor Quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. D. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. E. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.2 Mock-ups A. Testing may be performed under provisions identified in the respective product specification sections and as otherwise directed by HCD personnel. B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Approved mock-ups (in conjunction with the other requirements of the Contract Documents) shall be a standard of quality for judging the Work. D. If mock-up is specified to be removed, remove and dispose of the mock-up only after mock-up has been approved by HCD and when directed to do so. 3.3 Tolerances A. Comply with manufacturer s tolerances. B. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions and position before securing products in place. 3.4 Testing and Inspection A. See Scope of Work for testing requirements. B. Testing Agency Duties 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

38 Quality Requirements Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with HCD and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify HCD personnel and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by HCD. 7. Submit reports of all tests / inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing / Inspection Agency Authority 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested / inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested / inspected. c. To facilitate tests / inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Provide reasonable notice to HCD personnel and laboratory of expected time for operations requiring testing / inspection services to permit HCD personnel and testing laboratory to schedule their activities. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency. Payment for re-testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price. 3.5 Manufacturer s Field Services A. When specified in the Scope of Work or when requested by HCD personnel, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, and testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers written instructions. 3.6 Defect Assessment A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. END OF SECTION

39 Temporary Facilities and Controls SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Utilities B. Temporary sanitary facilities C. Temporary closures D. Temporary security E. Vehicular access and parking F. Construction debris and waste removal G. Contractor use of site 1.2 Utilities A. Contractor may utilize existing utilities, if available, to complete the rehabilitation project. B. If utilities at the property are non-existent or insufficient to complete construction activities, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all temporary electrical power, lighting, water, heating, cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes, including all connection costs. 1. Where temporary power is needed, the Contractor must use a meter provided by OUC on a 4 x 4 pressure treated pole with bracing as approved by the Permitting Services Division. 2. Contractor is responsible for water connection and the connection fee for all new and reconstruction projects. C. Utility outages and shutdown 1. Coordinate any disruption of utility services with the Owner. 2. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. 1.3 Temporary Sanitary Facilities A. Do not use Owner s restroom facilities. B. Contractor s option to provide and maintain temporary toilet facilities or utilize off site facilities, except when require by Scope of Work to provide for Owner s use. 1. Contractor maintains sole responsibility for security of temporary toilet facilities. 2. Maintain clean and sanitary condition of temporary toilet facilities on a daily basis. 1.4 Barriers A. Provide barriers, barricades, covered walkways, etc., required by governing authorities for public rightof-way or preventing unauthorized entry to construction areas. B. Provide protection for plants to remain. Replace damaged plants. C. Protect vehicles of others, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. D. Fencing 1. When required by the Scope of Work write up, provide commercial grade chain link fence around construction site. E. Interior enclosures 1. When required by the Scope of work write up, provide temporary partitions to separate work areas from other occupied portions of the building, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into the other occupied areas and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. a. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. 1.5 Security A. Provide security to protect Work, materials, equipment, etc., from unauthorized entry, vandalism or theft. 1.6 Vehicular Access and Parking A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. D. Coordinate temporary parking to accommodate construction personnel with the Owner.

40 Temporary Facilities and Controls Construction personnel shall car pool to minimize parking needs. 2. Parking on yards is not permitted. 1.7 Construction Debris and Waste Removal A. Provide containers with lids when possible. B. All construction site debris shall be placed in a container on a daily basis. No debris shall be left in the yard or uncontained at the job site. Code Enforcement will cite for violations. C. Remove trash from site regularly. D. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. E. If materials to be re-used on the project must be stored on site, provide suitable non-combustible containers. Locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. F. If the contractor is recycling materials, not for reuse at the site, the dismantling of such materials will not be performed at the job site. G. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. H. All areas will be thoroughly cleaned daily and at the completion of the project. I. All debris will be disposed of legally. 1.8 Contractor Use of Site A. Construction operations are limited to the existing building under rehabilitation. B. Provide access to and from site as required by local governing agencies and by the Owner. C. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. D. No signs are allowed, except those required by law. 1.9 Removal of Utilities and Controls A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, etc., prior final inspection. B. Underground installations shall be removed to a minimum depth of 2 feet, grading site as required after completion of work. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. Part 2 Part 3 Products Not Used Execution Not Used END OF SECTION

41 Product Requirements Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. General product requirements B. Prohibition of asbestos containing materials C. Re-use of existing products D. Storage and protections E. Product option requirements F. Substitution requirements and procedures G. Spare parts and maintenance materials SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Part 2 Products 2.1 Existing Products A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner. Notify Owner promptly upon discovery. Protect, remove, handle, and store items as directed by the Owner. C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner or otherwise indicated as to remain at the Project site, become the property of the Contractor and are to be removed from the site. D. If repair of existing work is called for in the Scope of Work, the item that is to be repaired must be placed in equal to new condition by either patching or replacement. E. All damaged, loose, or rotted parts shall be removed and replaced, and the finished work shall match adjacent work in design and dimension. 2.2 New Products A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Do not use products that contain 1 percent or more by weight of asbestos (asbestiform varieties of chrysotile (serpentine), crocidolite (riebeckite), amosite (cummingtonite-grunerite), anthophylite, tremolite, or actinolite). 2.3 Product Options A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only Use any product meeting those standards or description, and comply with the remaining requirements of the Project. B. Products Specified by naming One or more Brand Name Products or Manufacturers Use one of the brand name products specified, or product of the manufacturers specified, and comply with the remaining requirements of the Project. 2.4 Spare Parts and Maintenance Products A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and quantities specified in individual specifications sections. B. Deliver all spare parts and maintenance products to project site. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Substitution Procedures A. Approval of substitutions after the award of Contract may occur only by Contract Modification. B. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals without separate written request complying with the requirements specified herein. C. Substitution Submittal Procedure 1. Submit the Request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Accompany requests during the bidding period with a completed Pre-Bid Substitution Request. See Section Pre-Bid Substitution Request.

42 Product Requirements Accompany requests after the receipt of Bids with a completed Post-Bid Substitution Request as specified in Section Post-Bid Substitution Request. 4. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on the proposer. Substitution requests will only be accepted from the General Contractor. 5. Accompany requests after the receipt of bids with complete documentation of cost (whether cost will increase, decrease, or remain the same) for both the specified item and the proposed item. Provide full information required for evaluation, including: a. Quantities of materials and the cost thereof including shipping to the site. b. Man hours of labor and hourly cost including payroll taxes, insurance, and benefits for each skill or labor classification. c. Quantities and costs of equipment, tools, and other material not incorporated into the work. d. Overhead and profit. e. Credit for deletions from the Contract Price, similarly documented. f. Justification for any change in Contract Time. g. Other information requested by HCD personnel. 6. HCD personnel will notify the Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work, which may be required for the Work to be completed with no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension, which may subsequently become apparent. E. The HCD Program Manager s decision with regard to proposed substitutions is final. 3.2 Storage and Protection A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Coordinate storage with Owner. B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. F. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION

43 Pre-bid Substitution Request PRE-BID SUBSTITUTION REQUEST To:, Housing and Community Development Program Manager City hall, 7 th Floor, 400 S Orange Ave, Orlando, Florida Re: Substitution of the following is hereby requested in accordance with the Contract Documents and Section of the specifications. Specified Product: Section #: Page #: Paragraph #: Reason for Requesting Substitution: Check all that apply Contractor cannot provide the specified product, assembly or method of construction within the Contract Time. Provide documentation of conflict. The request directly relates to an or-equal clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. The request directly relates to a product design standard or performance standard clause in the Contract Documents. The requested substitution offers a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations, after deducting addition responsibilities. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by an authority having jurisdiction. Provide documentation of conflict. Contractor cannot provide the specified product, assembly or method of construction in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. Contractor cannot coordinate the specified product, assembly or method of construction with other materials and where Contractor certifies they can coordinate the proposed substitution. The specified product, assembly or method of construction could not provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty. Other: Provide written explanation. Proposed Product Information: Manufacturer: Address: Product Trade Name, Model #, other characteristics: Name & Address of Fabricator / Supplier:

44 Pre-bid Substitution Request Check One: The proposed product complies with the Contract Documents in every respect except for the specified manufacturer name or brand name or model number. The proposed product material complies with the Contract Documents in every respect except for deviations, which are as follows: Check One: No Changes are required in other work or products if the substitute product is approved. Changes will be required in other Work or products if the substitute product is approved, as follows: Describe Maintenance Services and Replacement Material Availability, if applicable: Contractor s Certification: To the Owner, HCD, to other bidders and sub-bidders (of any tier), and to the Contractor(s) and Subcontractors and Suppliers (of any tier) to whom contracts are eventually awarded in connection with the project, the undersigned warrants that the undersigned: has examined the bidding documents for the project, has investigated the proposed product and has found it to be equal or superior in all significant respects to the specified product, will provide the same warranty for the proposed product as for the specified product, will coordinate the installation and make other changes which may be required for the work to be complete in all respects, including re-design, additional components, and additional capacity required by other work affected by the change, and waives all claims for additional costs and time extensions which subsequently may become apparent and which are caused by the change. Enclosures: Complete product data, as specified in the Contract Documents, is enclosed with this request. Additional documentation will be submitted if required by HCD. Submitted by: General Contractor bidding the project: Authorized Signature: Date: Typed Name: Requests for substitution by those other than a General Contractor bidding the project will not be considered. END OF PRE-BID SUBSTITUTION

45 Post-bid Substitution Request POST-BID SUBSTITUTION REQUEST To:, Housing and Community Development Program Manager City hall, 7 th Floor, 400 S Orange Ave, Orlando, Florida Re: Substitution of the following is hereby requested in accordance with the Contract Documents and Section of the specifications. Specified Product: Section #: Page #: Paragraph #: Reason for Requesting Substitution: Check all that apply Contractor cannot provide the specified product, assembly or method of construction within the Contract Time. Provide documentation of conflict. The request directly relates to an or-equal clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. The request directly relates to a product design standard or performance standard clause in the Contract Documents. The requested substitution offers a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations, after deducting addition responsibilities. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by an authority having jurisdiction. Provide documentation of conflict. Contractor cannot provide the specified product, assembly or method of construction in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. Contractor cannot coordinate the specified product, assembly or method of construction with other materials and where Contractor certifies they can coordinate the proposed substitution. The specified product, assembly or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty. Other: Provide written explanation. Proposed Product Information: Manufacturer: Address: Product Trade Name, Model #, other characteristics: Name & Address of Fabricator / Supplier:

46 Post-bid Substitution Request Check One: The proposed product complies with the Contract Documents in every respect except for the specified manufacturer name or brand name or model number. The proposed product material complies with the Contract Documents in every respect except for deviations which are as follows: Check One: No Changes are required in other work or products if the substitute product is approved. Changes will be required in other Work or products if the substitute product is approved, as follows: Describe Maintenance Services and Replacement Material Availability, if applicable: Check One: No change in the Contract Sum is proposed. Modification of the Contract Sum by adding $ is hereby requested. Modification of the Contract Sum by subtracting $ is hereby requested. Check One: No change in the Contract Time is proposed. Modification of the Contract Time by adding calendar days is hereby requested. Modification of the Contract Time by subtracting calendar days is hereby requested. Contractor s Certification: To the Owner, HCD, to other bidders and sub-bidders (of any tier), and to the Contractor(s) and Subcontractors and Suppliers (of any tier) to whom contracts are eventually awarded in connection with the project, the undersigned warrants that the undersigned: has examined the bidding documents for the project, has investigated the proposed product and has found it to be equal or superior in all significant respects to the specified product, will provide the same warranty for the proposed product as for the specified product, will coordinate the installation and make other changes which may be required for the work to be complete in all respects, including re-design, additional components, and additional capacity required by other work affected by the change, and waives all claims for additional costs and time extensions which subsequently may become apparent and which are caused by the change.

47 Post-bid Substitution Request Enclosures: The following complete information is enclosed for evaluation: Complete product data, as specified in the Contract Documents, is enclosed with this request. Additional documentation will be submitted if required by HCD. Quantities of materials and the cost thereof including shipping to the site. Man-hours of labor and hourly cost including payroll taxes, insurance, and benefits for each skill or labor classification. Overhead and profit. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. Justification for any change in Contract Time. Other information requested by the HCD. Submitted by: General Contractor bidding the project: Authorized Signature: Date: Typed Name: Requests for substitution by those other than a General Contractor bidding the project will not be considered. END OF POST-BID SUBSTITUTION

48 Execution Requirements SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures B. Requirements for alterations work C. Cutting and patching D. Cleaning and protection E. Demonstration and instruction of Owner 1.2 Submittals A. When indicated in the Scope of Work write up, provide survey work. 1. Submit name, address, and contact information of Surveyor prior to starting survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed and sealed by the Land Surveyor and survey logs for the project record. B. When indicated in the Scope of Work write up, provide a demolition plan as required by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures. 1.3 Qualifications A. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required. 1. Minimum of 10 years of documented experience. B. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State of Florida and acceptable to HCD personnel. Submit evidence of Surveyor s Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. C. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in the State of Florida. 1.4 Project Conditions A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Dust Control Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. C. Rodent and Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents and pests and insects from accessing or invading premises. D. Pollution Control Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. 1.5 Coordination A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work. G. Coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner s activities.

49 Execution Requirements Part 2 Products Not Used Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over ordering or mis-fabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: 1. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. 2. After uncovering existing work, access conditions affecting performance of Work. 3. Initiation of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing condition. 3.2 Preparation A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying nah6y new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 Laying Out The Work A. Promptly notify HCD of any discrepancies discovered. 3.4 General Installation Requirements A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.5 Alterations A. The Scope of Work write up are not record documents or precise surveys of actual conditions. B. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications. Take care to prevent water and humidity damage. 1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior enclosure weatherproof. 2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by alterations work. C. Remove existing work as required to accomplish new Work. 1. Remove items indicated to be removed in the Scope of Work write up. 2. Relocate items indicated to be relocated in the Scope of Work write up. 3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and repair existing surfaces as required to receive new finish. Remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. D. Services, including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications: Remove, relocate, and extend existing syst4ems to accommodate the Work.

50 Execution Requirements Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation. Maintain access to equipment and operation components. If necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operation condition. Repair supply, distribution, and equipment as require. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize duration of outages. b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment including those above accessible ceilings. Remove back to source of supply where possible; otherwise, cap stub and tag with identification. Patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. E. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure. Provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Pat as specified for patching new work. F. Adapt existing work to fit to new Work. G. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Owner and HCD for discussion. H. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps or bulkheads. I. Where a change of plane of ¼ inch or more occurs in existing work, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition to Owner and HCD for review and request instructions. J. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 2. If Mechanical or Electrical work is exposed accidentally during the Work, re-cover and refinish to match. 3. Patch as specified for patching new work. K. Clean existing systems and equipment. Change filter on HVAC units. L. Do not begin new construction in alteration areas before demolition is complete. 3.6 Cutting and Patching A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or nonconforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. B. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. C. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed without prior approval. E. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. Refinish surface to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

51 Execution Requirements H. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. I. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.7 Progress Cleaning A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawls spaces, downspouts, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. 3.8 Protection of Installed Work A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished areas and materials or existing materials and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed. Reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.9 Demonstration and Instruction A. Demonstrate to Owner the start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season near the onset of the other season. C. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the project / equipment to perform demonstration and instruction of Owner. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as the basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction Adjusting A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation Final Cleaning A. Clean all areas affected by completion of the Work. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces, and dust and mop hard flooring. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Clean permanent washable filters and replace disposable filters of operating equipment. F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. G. Clean site, sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces that were disturbed by the Work. H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in a legal manner. Do not burn or bury debris. END OF SECTION

52 Warranty SECTION WARRANTY Part 1 General 1.1 This section includes: A. Third Party Warranty B. Roofing Warranty C. Project Warranty D. Exclusions E. Limits, Correction and Scheduling 1.2 Submittals A. The Contractor shall execute and submit to the Owner, Project Warranties in the forms included in Section and Section ; as well as, Third Party Warranty specified. The Roofing Warranty shall likewise be executed by the Subcontractor, if any, performing the roofing Work. 1.3 Contractor Provided Warranties A. Roofing Warranty See Section The Contractor and the Subcontractor, if any, (hereinafter called Principals) are jointly and severally held and firmly bound unto the Owner, and that the Contractor and Subcontractor bind their executors and administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. 2. The condition of the above obligation is such that the Contractor has entered into a contract with the Owner and the Subcontractor, if any, have entered into a contract with the Contractor. 3. The Principals warrant with respect to the roofing work that for a period of five years from the date of Final Payment on the Project, the roof of the building, buildings, or covered passages included in the Scope of Work write up, shall be absolutely watertight and free from all leaks, seepage or dampness, and that the Work is otherwise free of defects, and that the Principals shall, at no expense to the Owner, correct the Work in a manner compatible to the system and acceptable under industry standards and in accordance with the Contract Documents and local governing authorities. 4. Defective Work for the purposes of the Roofing Warranty and the General Conditions shall include, but not be limited to: a. Failure to maintain a water-tight condition as evidenced by entry of water: 1. Into the building. 2. Into substrates. 3. Within roofing assemblies. b. Development in roofing or in flashing of blisters, exposed felts, ridges, wrinkles, splits, warped insulation, or loose flashing. c. Failure of roofing or of flashing in any of the modes of cohesion, adhesion, tear, peel, etc., or to bond to the substrate, whether or not, at the time of discovery, the roofing or flashing remain water-tight. d. Failure of Work to conform to other requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Contractor s Warranty See Section The Contractor shall warrant with respect to the rehabilitation / reconstruction work that for a period of one year from the date of the Final Payment on the Project, the rehabilitation / reconstruction work shall be free of defects and shall, at no expense to the Owner, correct the Work in a manner

53 Warranty compatible to the system and acceptable under industry standards and in accordance with the Contract Documents and local governing authorities. 2. The Contractor s Warranty shall not be limited by, or limit, additional warranty requirements of manufacturers or other warranty requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Exclusions 1. Insufficient maintenance and normal wear and tear under normal usage, in as much as the Contractor acknowledges to the Owner that the quality of materials and workmanship required by the Contract Documents can reasonably be expected not to require maintenance, nor to suffer from normal usage, during and well beyond the warranty period. 2. Damage from digging, trenching, or excavation by the Owner that affects the Work. 3. Defects or failures resulting from abuse by the Owner. 4. Damage caused by fire, tornado, hail, hurricane, acts of God, wars, riots, or civil commotion. D. Limits, Correction, and Scheduling 1. The obligation to correct defects shall include removal and replacement of other, non-defective Work (including but not limited to interior and exterior finishes or materials) if necessary to access and repair the work, or in the event such other Work is damaged because of such defects. 2. No provision of any manufacturer s warranty or any provision of any other product, material, or workmanship warranty otherwise furnished shall be effective to reduce or otherwise limit any Warranty required by the Contract Documents. 3. No provision of any Warranty shall be effective to reduce or otherwise limit other rights to correction which the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents. 4. During warranty periods, when the homeowner notifies the Contractor or HCD of a problem, the Contractor shall arrange to inspect the problem at the jobsite within seven (7) calendar days. If the problem is determined to be the responsibility of the Contractor, he/she must make corrections with fourteen (14) calendar days. 5. If the Contractor feels the problem does not fall under the requirements of the warranty or is a result of Owner abuse, the Contractor shall notify authorized HCD personnel to review. The HCD Program Manager will make all final determinations about corrective action. 1.4 Third Party Warranty A. The Contractor as an expense of the Project shall purchase a Third Party Warranty, covering the Work completed. The Third Party Warranty shall be provided only from the approved company, at the agreed upon rate, and by a warranty provider approved Contractor. Part 2 Products 2.1 Third Party Warranty provider shall be 2-10 Home Buyers Warranty. A. Contractor must be an approved vendor of the Warranty provider. Part 3 Execution Not Used END OF SECTION

54 Roofing Warranty ROOFING WARRANTY A. Know all men by these presents, that the Contractor and the Subcontractor, if any, (hereinafter called Principals) jointly and severally are held and firmly bound unto the Owner, and that the Contractor and Subcontractor bind their executors and administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents. The condition of the obligation is such that the Contractor has entered into a Contract with the Owner (and the Subcontractor, if any, has entered into a contract with the Contractor) for the Project identified below. B. The Principals warrant with respect to the roofing work that for a period of five years from the issuance date of the Final Payment on the Project, the roof of the building, buildings, or covered passages included in the Scope of Work write up, shall be absolutely watertight and free from all leaks, seepage or dampness, and that the Work is otherwise free of defects (as defined in the Contract Documents), and that the Principals shall, at no expense to the Owner, correct the Work in a manner compatible to the system and acceptable under industry standards and in accordance with the Contract Documents and local governing authorities. C. The Principals request that the Owner give the Principals notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. IN WITNESS THEREOF, the undersigned has signed and sealed this instrument this day of, Project Name: Agreement Date: The Contractor: Partner / Witness By: (print name) (print name) Title: The Subcontractor: Partner / Witness By: (print name) (print name) Title: STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF ORANGE Personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, who is personally known to me or produced as identification, and did/did not take an oath. Notary Public My Commission Expires: Instructions for execution: Print on Contractor s Letterhead. If the firm is a partnership, all members of the partnership must execute. If the firm is a corporation, the president must sign, the secretary must witness and the seal of the corporation must be affixed. If the firm operates as a sole proprietorship, the proprietor must execute. END OF ROOFING WARRANTY Department Housing and Community Development

55 Contractor Warranty CONTRACTOR WARRANTY A. Know all men by these presents, the undersigned, hereinafter referred to as the Contractor, hereby guarantees the Work performed by himself / herself and his / her Subcontractors pursuant to the Housing Rehabilitation Work Contract, hereinafter referred to as Contract, with, hereinafter referred to as the Owner, dated, on the real property located at, Orlando, Florida for a period of one (1) year from the date final payment is issued. The condition of the obligation is such that the Contractor has entered into a Contract with the Owner for the Project identified below. B. The Contractor warrants with respect to the contracted Work that for a period of one (1) year from the issuance date of the Final Payment on the Project, the Work shall be free of defects and that the Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, correct the Work in a manner compatible to the system and acceptable under industry standards and in accordance with the Contract Documents and local governing authorities. C. The Contractor s Warranty shall not be limited by, or limit, additional warranty requirements of manufacturers or other warranty requirements of the Construction Documents. D. The Contractor requests that the Owner give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. IN WITNESS THEREOF, the undersigned has signed and sealed this instrument this day of, Project Name: Agreement Date: The Contractor: Partner / Witness By: (print name) (print name) Title: STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF ORANGE Personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, who is personally known to me or produced as identification, and did / did not take an oath. Notary Public My Commission Expires: Instructions for execution: Print on Contractor s Letterhead. If the firm is a partnership, all members of the partnership must execute. If the firm is a corporation, the president must sign, the secretary must witness and the seal of the corporation must be affixed. If the firm operates as a sole proprietorship, the proprietor must execute. END OF CONTRACTOR WARRANTY Department Housing and Community Development

56 Demolition SECTION DEMOLITION Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Selective demolition of building or site elements as outlined in the Scope of Work write up for alterations purposes. 1.2 References A. 29 CFR 1926 U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards B. NFPA 241 Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations 1.3 Submittals A. When required by the Scope of Work write up, submit a demolition plan that indicates the following: 1. Site usage and vegetation to be protected. 2. Extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction of barricades and fences. 3. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 4. Include summary of safety procedures. B. Demolition plans shall be as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Demolition firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required. 1. Contractor must be certified for work around lead based paint. Part 2 Products Not Used Part 3 Execution 3.1 Scope A. Remove all items indicated in the Scope of Work write up or required to be removed in order to complete the rehabilitation Work. B. Protect all existing surfaces, components, vegetation, etc., adjacent to demolition work from damage. C. Unless testing proves otherwise, Contractor should assume that lead based paint exists on the property and the Contractor and/or their workers and Subcontractors should be certified to work around lead based paint. 3.2 General Procedures and Project Conditions A. Comply with other requirements specified in section B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA Use of explosives is not permitted. 4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures. 5. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers, Owner, or public. 6. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 7. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 8. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits. Do not obstruct required exits at any time. Protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 9. Obtain written permission from Owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. C. Do not begin removal until receipt of Notification to Proceed. D. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.

57 Demolition E. Do not begin removal until vegetation to be relocated has been removed and specified measures have been taken to protect vegetation to remain. F. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures or elements. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures or elements appear to be in danger. G. Hazardous Materials: Comply with 29 CFR 1926 and State and City regulations. H. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials. Store and deliver to collection point or point of refuse. I. Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface for partial removal of paving when indicated in the Scope of Work write up. 3.3 Existing Utilities A. Coordinate work with Utility companies when demolition work impacts services. Notify Utility before starting work and comply with their requirements and obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities and services to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use. E. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 3.4 Selective Demolition for Alterations A. The Scope of Work write up is based on casual field observation. 1. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. C. Remove work when indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry when indicated and replace with new construction specified. D. Remove utility services and equipment only when ready to immediately install new services and equipment. 1. Maintain existing active systems and utilities that are to remain in operation. Maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment. Remove back to source of supply, where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. E. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure and provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.5 Debris and Waste Removal A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION

58 Regulated Materials SECTION REGULATED MATERIALS Part 1 General 1.1 General Requirements A. The Contractor is responsible for the coordination of the Work of this Section with that of all other sections and the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall abide by all pertinent federal, state, and local laws, guidelines and regulations governing the removal, handling, and disposal of regulated materials. C. The Contractor assumes responsibility for activities associated with regulated material identification, removal, handling, and disposal. D. The City and Owner shall not incur any additional costs due to negligence or regulatory requirements imposed upon this project due to Contractor failing to abide by the requirements of the Contract Documents and applicable regulations. E. A regulated materials survey / analysis of the property has not been completed on this property; however, given the age of the property the existence of regulated materials should be assumed and planned for in construction activities. 1.2 Submittals A. Contractor shall be responsible for developing a removal, handling, and disposal plan and implementing the removal, handling and disposal in accordance with all federal, state, and local laws, guidelines and regulations. 1.3 Special Considerations A. Contactor shall coordinate all activities to avoid unnecessary regulated material exposure to other trades, sub-contractors, and building occupants. 1.4 Codes and Standards A. All work shall conform to the standards set by applicable federal, state, and local laws, regulations, ordinances, and guidelines in such form in which they exist at the time of the Work on the Contract and may be required by subsequent regulations. B. All regulations and requirements of / by governing agencies in their most current version are applicable throughout this Project. Where there is a conflict between the Contract Documents and the federal, state, or local regulations, the most restrictive or stringent requirements shall prevail. C. This Section refers to requirements of governmental agencies, but in no way is it intended to cite or reiterate all provisions therein or elsewhere. It is the Contractor s responsibility to know, understand, and abide by all such regulations and common practices. Part 2 Products Not Used Part 3 Execution 3.1 General A. All material and equipment to be used on this Project shall comply with all federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and guidelines. B. All temporary facilities, work procedures, equipment, materials, services and agreements must strictly adhere to and meet this Section along with EPA and OSHA regulations and recommendations as well as all federal, state, and local laws, regulations and guidelines. Where overlap of these regulations exists, the most stringent one applies. C. Existing non-regulated materials shall not be removed from the building and site except as otherwise provided herein or in the Contract Documents. 3.2 Disposal of Construction Debris, Final Cleaning, and Hygiene Practices A. The Contractor shall comply with all pertinent federal, state, and local laws, guidelines and regulations governing the removal, handling and disposal of regulated materials. End of Section

59 Cast-In-Place Concrete SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Floors and slabs on grade. B. Concrete reinforcement. C. Joint devices associated with concrete work. D. Concrete curing. 1.2 References A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) All concrete work shall comply with ACI standards for materials and placement. B. ASTM A 185/A 185M Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. C. ASTM A 615/A 615M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. E. ASTM C 39/C 39M Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. F. ASTM C 94/C 94M Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. G. ASTM C 143/C 143M Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. H. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement. I. ASTM C 171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing concrete. J. ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. K. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout, nonshrink. L. ASTM C 1240 Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures. M. ASTM D 994 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete, bituminous type. N. ASTM E 1745 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. B. Samples: Submit two (2) samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. C. Samples: Submit two (2) six inch (6 ) long samples of construction joint devices. D. Manufacturer s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction for concrete accessories. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Perform work of this section in Accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. Part 2 Products 2.1 Reinforcement A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615/M Grade 60 (420). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Form: Flat sheets. 2. Mesh Size: 6 x Wire Gage: W 4 x W 4

60 Cast-In-Place Concrete C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1 ½ inches of weathering surfaces. 2.2 Concrete Materials A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Class N. E. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI F. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.3 Accessory Materials A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid, or aluminum reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. Single ply polyethylene is prohibited. B. Non-shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 hours: 2,400 psi. C. Moisture-retaining Cover: ASTM C171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. 2.4 Bonding and Jointing Products A. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion during placement. 1. Size: ½ inch throat, ½ inch deep. B. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, ¼ inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile. C. Joint filler: Compressible asphalt mastic with felt facers, complying with ASTM D 994, ¼ inch thick and 4 inches deep. 2.5 Concrete Mix Design A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI recommendations. B. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,000 psi. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 4. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 5 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 5. Cement content: Minimum 390 lb per cubic yard. 6. Water Cement Ratio: maximum 40 percent by weight. 7. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 8. Maximum Slump: 3 inches 9. Maximum Aggregate Size: ¾ inch. 2.6 Mixing A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94/M. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with Work of this Section. 3.2 Preparation A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.

61 Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. C. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings; repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 3.3 Installing Reinforcement A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.4 Placing Concrete A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C. Notify HCD not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. E. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum of 6 inches and seal watertight. F. New concrete shall be separated from existing construction by ½ inch asphalt impregnated expansion joint mater8ial. G. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. H. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Ste top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. I. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within ½ inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section for finish joint sealer requirements. J. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. K. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section L. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. M. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. N. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. O. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum ¼ inch in 10 feet. P. Porch slabs shall be poured on top of stem wall with a ¾ inch overhang. Q. Driveways are to be a minimum of ten (10) feet wide and to extend from the garage / carport to street with the appropriate apron, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 Concrete Finishing A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas ¼ inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas ¼ inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. D. Concrete Slabs: finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100 nominal. F. Exterior steps and slabs shall have a broom or texture finish. 3.6 Curing and Protection

62 Cast-In-Place Concrete A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. 2. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-retaining cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive. 3.7 Field Quality Control A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointing firm. C. Submit proposed mix designs of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under the same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M. 3.8 Defective Concrete A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to HCD and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete is required. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. END OF SECTION

63 Unit Masonry SECTION UNIT MASONRY Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Concrete Block B. Mortar and Grout C. Reinforcement and Anchorage D. Flashings E. Lintels F. Accessories 1.2 References A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 530 / ASCE 5/TMS 402 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures B. ACI / ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures C. ASTM A 82/A 82M Standard specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A 615/A 615M Standard specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM C 90 standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. G. ASTM C 94/C 94M standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. H. ASTM C140 Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. I. ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. J. ASTM C 150 Standard specification for Portland Cement. K. ASTM C 207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. L. ASTM C 270 Standard Specification for Mortar Unit Masonry. M. ASTM C 404 standard Specification for Aggregates for masonry Grout. N. ASTM C 780 Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. O. ASTM C 1019 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar and grout. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, reinforcement supporting and spacing devices, and accessories. C. Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength, unit assembly strength in each plane, and supporting test data. D. Manufacturer s Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530 / ASCE 5 / TMS 402 and ACI / ASCE 6 / TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.5 Pre-installation Meeting A. Convene a pre-installation meeting one week before starting work of this section. 1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.7 Environmental Requirements 1.1 Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI / ASCE 6 / TMS 602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. Part 2 Products 2.1 Concrete Masonry Units A. Concrete Block: Comply with reference standards and as follows:

64 Unit Masonry Size: standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depth of 8 inches. 2. Special shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners. 3. Load Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight. a. Both hollow and solid block. b. Exposed faces: manufacturer s standard color and texture. 2.2 Mortar and Grout Materials A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 Type N. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 2. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. C. Water: Clean and potable. 2.3 Reinforcement and Grout Materials A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Deformed billet-steel bars. B. Singly Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; inch side rods with inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than ½ inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. C. Strap Anchors: Ben steel shapes configured as required for specific situations, 1 ¼ inch width, inch thick, lengths as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than ½ inch of mortar coverage from masonry face, corrugated for embedment in masonry joint, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 2.4 Mortar Mixes A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. 2.5 Mortar mixing A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C 270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. D. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. 2.6 Grout Mixes A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 1. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less. 2. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. 2.7 Grout Mixing A. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C 476 for fine and coarse grout. 2.8 Preconstruction Testing A. Concrete Masonry: Test each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit in accordance with ASTM C 140 for conformance to requirements of this specification. B. Mortar Mixes: Test mortars prebatched by weight in accordance with ASTM C 780 recommendations for preconstruction testing. C. Grout Mixes: Test grout batches in accordance with ASTM C 1019 procedures. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. 3.2 Preparation

65 Unit Masonry A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust. C. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.3 Coursing A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing and protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.4 Placing and Bonding A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. C. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external corners. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after the mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 3.5 Reinforcement and Anchorage A. Reinforcement Bars: Secure and avoid displacement during grouting. Minimum spacing between bars or to masonry surfaces shall be one bar diameter. B. Joint Reinforcement: Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches on center. C. Anchors: Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless otherwise indicated or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 36 inches horizontally and 24 inches vertically. D. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry: Keep vertical cores to be grouted clear of mortar, including bed area of first course. 1. Bond Beams: At bond beams or other locations for horizontally reinforced masonry, provide special masonry units or saw to accommodate reinforcement. 3.6 Grouting A. Perform all grouting by means of low lift technique. Do not employ high lift grouting. B. Low Lift Grouting: 1. Limit height of pours to 12 inches. 2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches above each pour. 3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured. 4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for more than 1 ½ hours. 3.7 Built-In Work A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work and finish under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.8 Tolerances A. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: ¼ inch in 10 feet and ½ inch in 20 feet or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼ inch per storey non-cumulative; ½ inch in two stories or more.

66 Unit Masonry D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and ¼ inch in 10 feet; ½ inch in 30 feet. E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: ¼ inch. 3.9 Field Quality Control A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in section B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with ASTM C 140 for conformance to requirements of this specification. C. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with recommended procedures in ASTM C 780, testing with same frequency as masonry samples Cleaning A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations Protection of Finished Work A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION

67 Metal Fabrications SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.2 References A. ASTM A 36A / 36 M Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel B. ASTM A 53A / 53M Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless C. ASTM A 153A / 153M Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. E. ASTM A 500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. F. American Welding Society (AWS) AWS A2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. G. AWS D1.1 / D1.1M Structural Welding Code. H. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) SSPC Paint 20 Zink Rich Primers (Type I, Inorganic, and Type II, Organic ). I. SSPC SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning. 1.3 Submittals A. Shop Drawings: When required by the Scope of Work, provide documents for the design engineer s review and approval. Include the following: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 2. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. 4. Indicate net weld lengths. Part 2 Products 2.1 Materials Steel A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A 283. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53A / 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers: ASTM A 325 / 325M, Type 1 galvanized to ASTM A 153A / 53M where connecting galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1 / D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. G. Touch Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20, Type I Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 Fabrication A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.3 Finishes Steel A. Prime paint all steel items. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: Two coats.

68 Metal Fabrications Fabrication Tolerances A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.2 Preparation A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.3 Installation A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 / D1.1M. D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.4 Erection Tolerances A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼ inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: ¼ inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: ¼ inch. END OF SECTION

69 Rough Carpentry SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Wood blocking, framing, sheathing, furring, nailers, sub-flooring, rough hardware and light wood construction. 1.2 References A. American Plywood Association (APA) - APA E30 Engineered Wood Construction Guide. B. APA PRP-108 Performance Standards and Policies for Structural Use Panels. C. ASTM A 153A / 153M standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) - AWPA C20 Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes. E. AWPA C27 Plywood Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes. F. National Institute of Standards and Technology (Dept of Commerce) - PS 1, Construction and Industrial Plywood. G. National Institute of Standards and Technology (Dept of Commerce) - PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard 1.3 Submittals A. Product data on wood preservative materials, including certifications from treating plant. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. B. Product data for fire retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer, including certifications. C. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, submit statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to project site. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: Any agency with rules approved by American Lumber Standards Committee. 2. Lumber of other species or grades, or graded by other agencies, is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified. 3. Grade Stamps for Concealed Lumber: Each piece of lumber, applied by inspection agency and showing compliance with each specified requirement. B. Plywood: comply with APA and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes. B. Support stacks at several uniformly spaced points to prevent deformation. Store stacks raised above ground. C. Cover to protect from rain and snow. Select and arrange cover to allow air circulation under and all around stacks to prevent condensation. Maintain and restore displaced coverings. D. Remove from the site any wood products that have been subjected to moisture or that do not comply with the specified moisture requirements. Part 2 Products 2.1 Dimension Lumber A. Size: Provide nominal sizes, complying with PS 20 except where actual sizes are specifically required. B. Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary for the support of work specified in other sections, whether or not specifically indicated, and including but not limited to blocking, nailers, etc. 1. Moisture content: 15 percent maximum (kiln-dry). 2. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or standard grade. 3. Boards: Construction, 2 common, or No. 2 grade. 2.2 Construction Panels A. Miscellaneous Panels:

70 Rough Carpentry B. Thicknesses: Where nominal thicknesses are indicated, provide actual thickness as follows, providing other project requirements such as grade, span rating, exposure, etc., are met: 1. ½ inch nominal: 7/16, 15/32, or ½ inch actual. 2. 5/8 inch nominal: 19/32, 5/8, or 21/32 inch actual. 3. ¾ inch nominal: 11/16 or 3/4/ actual inch nominal: 1 inch actual /8 inch nominal: 1 1/8 inch actual ¼ inch nominal: 1 ¼ inch actual. 2.3 Plastic Lumber A. General: 1. Allowable loads and spans, as documented in evaluation reports or in information referenced in evaluation reports, are not to be less than design load and spans. 2. Restricted to exterior use only. B. Composite Plastic Lumber: shapes made from a mixture of cellulose fiber and polyethylene or polypropylene. 1. Provide lumber with a minimum of 75 percent recycled content with a minimum of 25 percent postconsumer recycled content. 2. Decking Standard: ICC-ES AC109 or ICC-ES AC Shear Parallel to Length: Maximum 1,000 psi in accordance with ASTM D2344 / D234M. 4. Density: ASTM D Compressive Strength: a. Secant Modulus: Minimum 70,000 psi in accordance with ASTM D6108. b. Stress at 3 percent strain: Minimum 1,500 psi in accordance with ASTM D6108. c. Compression Parallel to Grain: Minimum 3,000 psi in accordance with ASTM D6112. d. Compression Perpendicular to Grain: Minimum 1,000 psi in accordance with ASTM D Flexural Strength: Minimum 2,000 psi in accordance with ASTM D Tensile Strength: Minimum 1,250 psi in accordance with ASTM D Surface Texture: Woodgrain, smooth. 9. Color: As selected from manufacturer s standard colors. C. All Plastic Lumber: Shapes made from high density polyethylene (HDPE), PVC, polystyrene, or cellular PVC with no cellulose fiber. 1. Provide lumber with a minimum of 75 percent recycled content with a minimum of 25 percent of post-consumer recycled content. 2. Decking Standard: ICC-ES AC Shear Parallel to Length: Maximum 1,000 psi in accordance with ASTM D2344 / D2344M. 4. Density: ASTM D Compressive Strength: a. Secant Modulus: Minimum 70,000 psi in accordance with ASTM D6108. b. Stress at 3 Percent Strain: Minimum 1,500 psi in accordance with ASTM D6108. c. Compression Parallel to Grain: Minimum 3,000 psi in accordance with ASTM D6112. d. Compression Perpendicular to Grain: Minimum 1,000 psi in accordance with ASTM D Flexural Strength: Minimum 2,000 psi in accordance with ASTM D Tensile Strength: Minimum 1,250 psi in accordance with ASTM D Surface Texture: Woodgrain, smooth. 9. Color: As selected from manufacturer s standard colors. 2.4 Fasteners A. Material: 1. Interior untreated wood: Steel. 2. Provide ASTM A 153 hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners for the following: a. Interior fire-retardant treated wood. b. Coated or electro-plated fasteners are not acceptable. 3. Provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners:

71 Rough Carpentry a. Exterior fire-retardant treated wood. 4. In contact with copper: Provide silicone bronze or copper material as specified in respective specification section. B. Provide fasteners as required by applicable codes and as specified in this Section unless other types and spacings are indicated for specific uses. C. Nails to Connect wood Nailers and Blocking to Wood: 1. Length to penetrate wood 1 ¼ inches. 2. Sized for not less than 100 pound withdrawal resistance. 3. Space in 2 rows staggered at 12 inches on center. D. Fasteners to Connect Wood to masonry and Concrete: 1. Expansion anchors or adhesive anchors, type suited to masonry conditions; Hilti or other approved manufacturer inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Space at 48 inches on center, maximum. E. Fasteners to Connect APA Panel Product to Steel or Wood: Type and spacing in accordance with APA E Wood Treatment A. All lumber and all construction panels used in building construction shall be untreated material unless explicitly identified to be fire retardant or preservative treatment is required or similar language or unless otherwise indicated in this Section. B. Preservative Treatment: 1 Do not treat Heart Redwood and Western Red Cedar. 2 Treat wood members and plywood exposed to weather or in contact with plaster, masonry or concrete, including framing of open roofed structures; sills, sole plates, furring, and sleepers that are less than 24 inches from soil; nailers, edge strips, blocking, crickets, curbs, cant, vent strips and other members provided in connection with roofing and flashing materials. 3 Treat other members specified as pressure / preservative treated. 4 Treat lumber and panels where direct exposure to wetting will occur. 5 Preservative treat by the pressure method complying with AWPA. Use category system standards U1 and T1, except any process involving the use of Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA) or other agents classified as carcinogenic for pressure treating wood is not permitted. C. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Fire retardant treated lumber: AWPA C Fire retardant treated plywood: AWPA C Interior: Low Hygroscopic and approved by AWPA for preservative qualities in above-ground, weather-protected locations. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Installation A. Arrange work to use full length pieces except where lengths would exceed commercially available lengths. Discard pieces with defects that would lower the required strength or appearance of the Work. B. Cut and fit members accurately. Install plumb and true to line and level. C. Fasten carpentry in accordance with applicable codes and recognized standards. D. Where exposed, countersink nails and fill flush with suitable wood filler. E. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.2 Miscellaneous Carpentry A. Provide miscellaneous blocking, nailers, grounds, furring, and framing as required support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Cut and shape to the required size. 1. Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary for the support of work specified in other sections or required for the support of work of other contracts, whether or not specifically indicated and including but not limited to blocking, nailers, etc.

72 Rough Carpentry Provide blocking at the following (but not limited to the following) locations: a. Casework and shelving. b. Wall mounted door stops. c. Wall guards and rails. 3. Do not space blocking or nailers; install continuous lengths with butt joints not exceeding 1/8 inch per 8 foot. B. Install wood furring plumb and level; shim as necessary to bring true to plane; install closure strips at ends perpendicular to main furring direction. 3.3 Installation of Construction Panels A. Install construction panels in accordance with APA E30. END OF SECTION

73 Finish Carpentry SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Finish carpentry items, including but not limited to: 1. Countertops 2. Cabinets B. Wood door frames, glazed frames. C. Wood casings and moldings. D. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.2 References A. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated) AWI / AWMAC (QSI) B. US Department of Commerce, Product Standard (PS): PS 1 Structural Plywood, PS American Softwood Lumber Standard. C. American Hardboard Association (AHA): A Basic Hardboard D. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): A Cabinet Hardware, A Cabinet Locks, and A Auxiliary Hardware. E. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA): HP1-09 Wood Particleboard. F. American Wood-Preservers Association (AWPA): AWPA C1-03 Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. G. National Particleboard Association (NPA): A Wood Particleboard. H. National electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): LD 3-05 High Pressure Decorative laminates 1.3 Administrative Requirements A. Coordinate the Work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent components. B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.4 Submittals A. Product data on fire retardant and preservative treatment materials. B. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware. C. Shop drawings for unique / unusual installations. Indicate materials, components profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, accessories, etc. 1.5 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer s Qualifications: company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with a minimum of 5 years of documented experience and a member in good standing of the AWI. 1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Protection A. Protect work from moisture damage, maintaining moisture content specified both during and after delivery at site. B. Store finishing lumber and millwork in weathertight well ventilated structures or in space in existing building. Store at a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F for not less than 10 days before installation. C. Pile lumber in stacks in such manner as to provide air circulation around surfaces of each piece. Part 2 Products 2.1 Materials General A. Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated for premium grade. B. Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as required by applicable code. C. Lumber size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard under which product is produced. D. Use edge grain Wood members exposed to weather. 2.2 Wood Based Components

74 Finish Carpentry A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site. 2.3 Lumber Materials A. Softwood Lumber painted finish condition: Poplar species with flat grain, of suitable quality for opaque finish, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hardwood Lumber painted finish condition: White Oak, number 1 common grade, with flat grain, of suitable quality for transparent finish unless otherwise indicated. C. Moisture Content 1. Interior finish lumber, trim, and millwork 1 ¼ inches or less in nominal thickness: 12 percent on 85 percent of the pieces and 15 percent on the remainder. 2. Exterior treated or untreated finish lumber and trim 4 inches or less in nominal thickness: 15 percent. 3. Moisture content of other materials shall be in accordance with the standards under which the products are produced. 2.4 Miscellaneous Woodwork A. Comply with AWI Standards for quality and fabrication as follows: 1. Lumber: Section 100, Grade 1 2. Panel Products: Section 200, book matching, Grade A 3. Standing and Running Trim: Section 300, Custom Grade. 4. Cabinet Construction: Section 400 as follows: a. Cabinets: Custom Grade, made with solid oak frame and doors, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Ornamental Items: Section 700, Custom Grade. 6. Stair work and Handrails: Section 800, Custom Grade. 7. Door Frames: Section 900, Custom Grade. 8. Wood Windows: Section 1000, Custom Grade, profiles to match existing profiles. 9. Installation: Section 1700, Custom Grade. B. Unless otherwise indicated, all miscellaneous wood trim items are to match existing trim profiles. 2.5 Sheet Materials A. Softwood Plywood Not Exposed to View: Any face species, veneer core; PS 1 Grade A-B; glue type as recommended for application. B. Softwood Plywood Exposed to View: Face species oak, plain sawn, medium density fiberboard core; PS 1 Grade A-B; glue type as recommended for application. C. Hardwood Plywood: Use plain sliced red oak or rotary cut white birch unless otherwise specified. 2.6 Particleboard A. Plastic Laminate Particleboard Cores: 1. Use Type 1, Grade 1-M-3, or Type 2, Grade 2-M-2, unless otherwise specified. 2. Use Type 2, Grade 2-M-2, exterior bond, for tops with sinks. B. General Use: Type 1, Grade 1-M-3 or Type 2, Grade 2-M Plastic Laminate A. Exposed decorative surfaces including countertops and for items having plastic laminate finish. General Purpose, Type HGL. B. Backing sheet on bottom of plastic laminate covered wood tops: Backer, Type HGP. C. Post Forming Fabrication, Decorative Surfaces: Post forming, Type HGP. 2.8 Adhesive A. For Plastic laminate: Fed. Specification A-A B. For Interior Millwork: Unextended urea resin, unextended melamine resin, phenol resin or resorcinol resin. C. For Exterior Millwork: Unextended melamine resin, phenol resin, or resorcinol resin. 2.9 Fasteners A. Of size and type to suit application. 1. Fasteners and anchors for preservative treated components shall be hot dip galvanized or stainless steel, except nails shall be hot dip galvanized.

75 Finish Carpentry Fasteners for trim shall be finishing nails for attachment to wood framing and trim head screws for attachment for metal framing. 3. Comply with manufacturer and APA recommendations for panel siding installation fasteners. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. C. Stainless Steel ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304. D. Aluminum Cast: ASTM B26. E. Aluminum Extruded: ASTM B Hardware A. Rough Hardware: 1. Furnish rough hardware with a standard plating, applied after punching, forming and assembly of parts; galvanized, cadmium plated, or zinc coated by electric galvanizing process. Galvanized where specified. 2. Use galvanized coating on ferrous material for exterior work unless non-ferrous metals or stainless is used. 3. Fasteners: a. Bolts and Nuts: FF-N-836. b. Expansion bolts: A-A-1922A. c. Screws: Fed. Spec. FF-S-111. B. Finish Hardware: 1. Cabinet hardware: ANSI A a. Door / Drawer pulls: U shaped wire pull, stainless steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers, unless otherwise indicated. b. Drawer Slides: Accuride 7434, with travel, for drawers 24 inches wide or less is the basis of design. 1. Overtravel: 1 inch. 2. Type: All ball bearing, full extension, rail mounted, hold in detent, smooth progressive movement. 3. Capacity: 100 pounds per pair of 18 inch slide length. 4. Finish: Clear zinc. c. Adjustable Shelf Standards: Standard side mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards and coordinated shelf rests, satin chrome finish for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. d. Concealed Hinges: European style concealed self- closing type, 120 or 125 degree opening angle, steel with polished finish. 1. Hafele America Co.; Duomatic hinges, 200 Series, no Julius Blum, Inc.; 125 Series, no 75M Salice America Inc.; series 200, No. C2R9A Or approved equal as recommended by fabricator to meet quality and specifications. e. Cabinet Door Catch: Magnetic 2. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI A a. Shelf Bracket: B04041, japanned or enameled finish. b. Combination Garment Rod and Shelf Support: B04051 japanned or enamel finish. c. Closet Bar: L03131 chrome finish of required length. d. Handrail Brackets: L03081 or L ) Cast Aluminum, satin polished finish. 2) Cast Malleable Iron, japanned or enamel finish. 3. Steel channel frame and leg supports for countertop. Fabricated under Section Metal Fabrications. 4. Edge Strip moldings: a. Driven type T shape with serrated retaining stem; vinyl plastic to match plastic laminate color, stainless steel, or 1/8 inch extruded aluminum. b. Stainless steel or extruded aluminum channels.

76 Finish Carpentry c. Stainless steel, number 4 finish; aluminum, mechanical applied medium satin finish, clear anodized 0.4 mils thick. 5. Rubber or Vinyl Molding: a. Rubber or vinyl standard stock and in longest lengths practicable. b. Design for closures at joints with walls and adhesive anchorage. c. Adhesive as recommended by molding manufacturer. 6. Primers: Manufacturer s standard primer for steel providing baked enamel finish Accessories A. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking, and miscellaneous support: Softwood lumber of Southern Pine species. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer. C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color Fire Retardant Treatment A. Where wood members and plywood are specified to be fire retardant treated, the treatment shall be in accordance with MIL-L B. Each piece of treated material shall bear identification of the testing agency and shall indicate performance in accordance with such rating of flame spread and smoke developed. C. Treat wood for maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 25. D. Fire Resistant Softwood Plywood: 1. Use Grade A, Exterior, plywood for treatment. 2. Meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. a. Flame Spread: 0 to 25. b. Smoke Developed: 100 maximum. E. Fire Resistant Hardwood Plywood: 1. Core: Fire retardant treated softwood plywood. 2. Hardwood face and back veneers untreated. 3. Factory seal panel edges, to prevent loss of fire retardant salts Preservative Treatment A. Wood members and plywood exposed to weather or in contact with plaster, masonry or concrete, including wood members used for rough framing of millwork items except heart-wood Redwood and Western Red Cedar shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPA Standards. B. Use Grade A, exterior plywood for treatment Fabrication A. General 1. Except as otherwise specified, use AWI Custom Grade for architectural woodwork, interior millwork, and cabinetry. 2. Finish woodwork shall be free from pitch pockets. 3. Except where special profiles are required, trim shall be standard stock molding and members of the same species, matching existing trim where applicable. 4. Plywood shall not be less than ½ inch, unless otherwise specified. 5. Edges of members in contact with concrete or masonry shall have a square corner caulking rebate. 6. Fabricate members less than 14 feet in length from one piece of lumber, back channeled and molded. 7. Interior trim and items of millwork to be painted may be fabricated from jointed, built-up, or laminated members, unless otherwise specified. 8. Plastic Laminate Work: a. Factory glued to either a plywood or a particle board core. b. Cover exposed edges with plastic laminate, except where aluminum, stainless steel, or plastic molded edge strips are specified. c. Provide plastic backing sheet on underside of countertops, vanity tops including back splashes and end splashes. d. Use backing sheet on concealed large panel surface when decorative face does not occur.

77 Finish Carpentry Mounting Strips, Shelves, and Rods: a. Cut mounting strips from 1 x 4 inches softwood stock, with exposed edge slightly rounded. b. Cut wood shelf from softwood 1 inch stock, minimum 12 inch width, exposed edge slightly rounded. c. Rod or Closet Bar; L Combination Garment and Shelf Support, intermediate support for closet bar: B04051 for all rods. 10. Pegboard: a. Perforated hardboard sheet. b. Spacing Strip: ½ by ½ inch; glued to hardboard sheet. 1. Locate at perimeter of sheet edge. 2. Locate material intermediate spacing strips at 32 inches o.c. c. Use ¾ inch one quarter round edge trim to cover exposed edge and finish flush with hardboard surface. Glue to spacing strip and hardboard. 11. Countertops: a. Fabrication with plastic laminate over 1 ½ inch thick core with post formed configuration, unless otherwise specified. 1. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. 2. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 3. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. 4. No but joints are permitted within 2 feet of sink cut outs. 5. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Prime paint cut edges. 6. Use decorative laminate for exposed edges of tops 1 ½ inches wide and on back splash and end splash. Back splash shall be a minimum of 4 inches tall. 7. Use one piece counters for straight runs. 8. Miter corners for field joints with overlapping blocking on underside of joint. 12. Wood Handrails: a. Fabricate from maple or Birch. b. AWI Premium Grade. c. Fabricate in one piece and one length when practical. d. Fabricate curved sections for ends of rails to return to wall and where rails change slope or direction. e. Joints are permitted only where rail changes direction or slope, or where necessary for field erection or shipping. f. Scarf or dowel all joints to provide a smooth and rigid connection. Glue all joints. g. Fit joints, to produce a hair line crack. h. Completely shop fabricated in accordance with approved shop drawings. 13. Medicine Cabinet: a. Basis of Design: Glacier Bay 20 inch x 25 inch, surface mounted, framed mirror front swing door or Owner approved equal. Manufacturer s standard color. 14. Cabinets: a. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay, solid oak frame and door construction. b. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts. Flush style of solid oak construction. c. Drawer Construction Technique: Dovetail joints. d. Assembly: shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. e. Fitting: when necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. f. Finish: Transparent. B. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.

78 Finish Carpentry Shop Finishing A. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentions. B. Finish work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1500: 1. Transparent: nitrocellulose lacquer (formerly TR-1). 2. Opaque: Nitrocellulose lacquer (formerly OP-1). C. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this Section are placed and ready to receive this work. C. Maintain work areas and storage areas to a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F for not less than 10 days before and during installation of interior millwork. D. Do not install finish lumber or millwork in any room or space where wet process systems such as concrete, masonry, or plaster work is not complete and dry. 3.2 Installation A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. C. Seal cut edges of preservative and fire retardant treated wood materials with a certified acceptable sealer. D. Install straight runs with butt joints and miter joints at corners. E. Coordinate with plumbing and electrical work for installation of fixtures and service connections in millwork items. F. Nail finish at each blocking, lookout, or other nailer and intermediate points; toggle or expansion bolt in place where nails are not suitable. G. Exterior Work: Joints shall be close fitted, metered, tongue and grooved, rebated, or lapped to exclude water. H. Cabinets and Countertops: Install per AWI standards, and according to manufacturer recommendations complying with all applicable Federal, State, and local building codes. 1. Touch up manufacturer s finishes that are marred or damaged due to installation or construction operations. Finishes that cannot be repaired will require cabinet and/or door replacement. I. Pegboard or Perforated Hardboard: 1. Install board with chromium plated steel round head toggle bolts or other fasteners capable of supporting board with loaded at 25 psf of board. 2. Install board with spacers to allow hooks and accessories to be inserted and removed. 3. Install ¼ inch round trim at perimeter to finish flush with face of board and close space between wall and hardboard. J. Shelves: 1. Install mounting strip at back wall and end wall for shelves in closets, secured with toggle bolts at each end and not over 24 inch centers between ends. a. Nail shelf to mounting strip at ends and to back wall strip at not over 36 inches on center. b. Install metal bracket, ANSI A156.15, B04041, not over 4 feet centers when shelves exceed 6 feet in length. c. Install metal bracket, ANSI A156.15, B04051, not over 4 feet on centers where shelf length exceeds 6 feet in length with metal rods, clothes hanger bars ANSI A156.6, L03131, of required length, for full length of shelf. K. Handrails: 1. Install in one piece and one length when practical.

79 Finish Carpentry Where rails change slope or direction, install special curved sections and ends of rails to return to wall, glue all field joints. 3. Secure rails with wood screws at 18 inches on center to balustrades top rail. 4. Install brackets within 12 inches of ends of handrails and at spaced intervals not to exceed 5 feet on center. Anchor brackets and rails to brackets with screws. L. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. 3.3 Preparation for Site Finishing A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Site Finishing: See Section C. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.4 Erection Tolerances A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION

80 Cultured Marble SECTION CULTURED MARBLE Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Bathroom Vanities 1.2 References A. ANSI Z124.3 Plastic Lavatories B. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer s Qualifications: Sufficient plant facilities to provide quality, shapes and sizes of engineered marble units required without delaying progress of the Work and a minimum of 10 years in producing engineered composite products. B. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who has demonstrated successful installation of engineered marble or cast polymer products similar to that specified. 1.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name, manufacturer, and individual item number. B. Store materials flat in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. C. Protect materials and finish from damaged during handling and installation in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. Part 2 Products 2.1 Engineered Composite A. Material: Engineered marble. B. Compliance: 1. ANSI Z ASTM E84. C. Performance Requirements: ANSI Z Color fastness: No changes, 200 hours. 2. Wear and Cleaning: Passes. 3. Impact resistance: No cracks or chips. 4. Stain resistance: Passes. 5. Chemical resistance: Passes. 6. Drain fitting Connection: Passes. 7. Loads on lavatory Tops: Passes. 8. Thermal Shock Resistance: Passes. 9. Cigarette Burn Test: Passes. D. Fabrication: 1. Mix clean aggregate filler with polyester resin to create a matrix. 2. Add colorants to matrix in a manner to provide veining to mimic appearance of natural marble products. 3. Pour material into molds behind gel coat. 4. Allow to fully cure to a solid material. 5. Provide consistent color throughout depth of material, not just the surface. E. Gel coat Thickness: 25 mils average. F. Minimum Thickness: Blocks, plugs, or other devices placed in molds to reduce specified thickness of load bearing surface(s) are not allowed. 2.2 Bathroom Vanities A. One piece vanity top with integral bowls and backsplash. B. Minimum Thickness: ¾ inch throughout vanity top deck and bowl. C. Vanity Tops:

81 Cultured Marble Depth: To match existing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Length: To match existing, unless otherwise indicated. D. Bowls: 1. Type: Single. 2. Style: Round, or to match existing. 3. Size: To match existing. 4. Overflow Drain: ½ inch OD PVC overflow hose permanently install in integral overflow drain. 5. Faucet Holes: Drill holes for plumbing fixtures in shop. Determine quantity and spacing of holes based on faucet selection by Owner. E. Backsplashes: 4 inch high rear, and side when adjacent to wall, backsplash. Integral or separate as determined acceptable to the Owner. F. Edges: ¾ inch bullnose. G. Color: Marble color to be selected from manufacturer s standard colors or to match existing as determined by the Owner. H. Finish: Uniform gloss finish. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Examine surfaces to receive engineered marble units. Do not being installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. B. Examine engineered composite units before installation. Do not install unacceptable units. 3.2 Installation A. Install engineered composite units in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. B. Install engineered composite units level, plumb, square, and in proper alignment. C. Make field cuts as necessary from unfinished bottom side in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. D. Form field joints using manufacturer s recommended adhesive. E. Fasten vanity tops to cabinets using 100 percent silicone-based adhesive. F. Attach separate backsplashes and side splashes to vanity tops in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. G. Do not excessively tighten faucet fixtures or sink drains on bathroom vanities. Hand tighten sink drains in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. H. Do not allow hot water temperature over 140 degrees F to come into contact with engineered composite units. 1. Repair nicks, scratches, and other minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and as approved by the Owner and HCD personnel. I. Remove and replace damaged units that cannot be successfully repaired. 3.3 Cleaning A. Clean and polish engineered composite units promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. B. Do not use abrasive or harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish. C. Protect finish from damage until job completion using plastic wrap, cardboard or a soft cloth. 3.4 Protection A. Protect installed engineered composite units from damage for the duration of the Project. END OF SECTION

82 Preparation for Re-roofing SECTION PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Removal of existing roofing system in preparation for a new roofing system. 1.2 Project Conditions A. Schedule Work to coincide with commencement of installation of new roofing system. B. Remove only existing roofing materials that can be replaced with new materials the same day. C. Coordinate the work with other affected mechanical and electrical work associated with roof penetrations. D. Protect building and landscaping from damage. 1.3 Material Ownership A. Assume Ownership of demolished materials and remove from Project site and dispose of legally, unless indicated to be reused, reinstalled, or otherwise to remain Owner s property. 1.4 Quality Control A. Work of this section must be completed by the same Installer of the new roofing system. B. When determined present, the Installer must be legally qualified to perform the removal of asbestos containing roofing materials. 1. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a licensed landfill facility. 1.5 Environmental Requirements A. Schedule Work to coincide with commencement of installation of new roofing system. B. Maintain continuous temporary protection prior to and during installation of new roofing system. Part 2 Products 2.1 Materials A. Temporary Protection: sheet polyethylene; provide weights to retain sheeting in position. Part 3 Execution 2.2 Examination A. Verify that existing roof surface is clear and ready for work of this section. 2.3 Preparation A. Sweep roof surface clean of loose matter. B. Remove loose refuse and dispose of offsite. 2.4 Material Removal A. Remove metal counter flashings, where necessary. B. Remove existing roofing system to wood decking. C. Repair existing wood deck surface to provide smooth working surface for new roof system. 2.5 Temporary Protection A. Provide temporary protective sheeting over uncovered deck surfaces. B. Turn sheeting up and over parapets and curbing. Retain sheeting in position with weights. C. Provide for surface drainage from sheeting to existing drainage facilities. D. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or repaired deck surface. END OF SECTION

83 Insulation SECTION INSULATION Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Board Insulation B. Batt / Blanket Insulation C. Loose Fill Insulation 1.2 References A. ASTM C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation B. ASTM C665 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. C. ASTM C728 Perlite Thermal Insulation Board D. ASTM C739 Cellulosic Fiber (Wood Base) Loose Fill Thermal Insulation. E. ASTM C764 Mineral Fiber Loose Fill Thermal Insulation F. ASTM C1015 Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation. G. ASTM C1289 Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. H. ASTM D4586 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. I. ASTM F1667 Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes and Staples. J. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Code of Federal Regulations 29 CFR K. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 211 Chimneys, fireplaces, Vents and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: Provide data on product to be installed with documentation highlighted to show compliance with or exceeding specified requirements. Include manufacturer s installation instructions. 1.4 Environmental Requirements A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.5 Quality Control A. Comply with recommendations of the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual applicable to insulation for storage, handling, and application and local and Florida state building codes. B. Comply with uplift pressure and wind design requirements of local and Florida state building codes, including Miami-Dade County for high wind zone design. 1.6 Quality Assurance A. Roof insulation on combustible decks shall have a flame spread rating not greater than 75 and a smoke developed rating not greater than 150, exclusive of covering, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, or shall have successfully passed FM Approvals Insulation bearing the UL label and listed in the UL Building Materials Director as meeting the flame spread and smoke developed ratings will be accepted in lieu of copies of test reports. 1.7 Delivery, Handling, and Storage A. Deliver materials to the site in the original sealed containers or packages bearing the manufacturer s name and brand designation. B. The containers or packages of insulation shall bear the type and class as applicable, recommended method of installation, minimum net weight of insulation, coverage charts, R values, and required warning statements. C. Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage and unload and store with minimum of handling. D. Storage spaces shall be dry locations, not subject to open flames or sparks, and permitting easy access for inspection and handling. Store insulation materials in a watertight enclosure. Part 2 Products 2.1 Board Insulation A. Roof Deck Insulation: Preformed roof insulation boards approved by roofing manufacturer.

84 Insulation Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. B. Tapered Roof Insulation System: When required in the Scope of Work Write Up. 1. Fabricate of Polyisocyanurate board insulation that is factory cut to provide slope. 2. Cut to provide high and low points with crickets and slopes to control flow of water away from vertical elements and off of the roof. 3. Minimum thickness of tapered sections 1 ½ inch. 4. Minimum slope ¼ inch per 12 inches. 2.2 Batt / Blanket Insulation A. Mineral Fiber: ASTM C665, Type II, Class C, Category 1 where framing is faced with gypsum board. B. Mineral Fiber: ASTM665, Type III, class A where framing is not faced with gypsum board. C. Sized for tight friction fit between faces of studs / joists without sagging or slumping. D. Sized for tight friction fit the entire depth of stud / joist. 2.3 Loose Fill Insulation A. Mineral Fiber Loose Fill: ASTM C764, Type I or II. B. Cellulosic or wood Fiber Loose Fill: ASTM C Accessories A. Vapor Retarder: As approved by the roofing manufacturer and deemed necessary by NRCA procedures. B. Fasteners: To meet local and Florida State building codes and as approved by roofing manufacturer. 1. Factory coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening insurance and cover boards to roof deck. 2. Staples and Nails: ASTM F1667, type as designed for item anchored and for substrate. 3. Nails and Staples for Batt / Blanket Insulation: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application. C. Coverboard: As recommended by roofing manufacturer for installation over roof deck / tapered insulation. D. Blocking 1. Wood, metal, mineral fiber or perlite boards or other approved materials. a. Mineral fiber Board: ASTM C612, Type IB. b. Perlite Board: ASTM C728. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Inspect attics to receive insulation for conditions which will adversely affect the execution of the work or create a safety hazard. 1. Per ASTM C1015, the inspection shall include checking for the following: a. Defects in electrical fixtures, equipment, wiring, junction boxes, receptacles, and switches that will cause hazards. b. Openings through which loose fill insulation material may escape. c. Air ducts which appear to have joints that are not secure or sealed. B. Do not install insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Fit all insulation tight against adjoining construction and penetrations. D. Prior to installation of loose fill insulation, provide blocking as follows: 1. Install blocking around access panels and vents if the level to which the unsettled insulation will be installed exceeds their height. Cover openings into the attic with temporary blocking to prevent insulation from falling into the opening, including spaces enclosed by blockings. 2. Install blocking around heat producing devices with minimum clearances as specified herein: a. Install blocking two inches above the height of the finished insulation installation and in a manner that ensures that devices which may require maintenance or servicing remain accessible after the insulation is installed. b. Minimum clearance for blocking around heat producing devices shall be as follows:

85 Insulation Masonry chimneys for equipment and incinerators operating at a temperature of not more than 1500 degrees F, 4 inches from the outside face of the masonry. 2. Vents, chimney and vent connectors, and chimneys other than masonry chimneys shall have a minimum clearance as required by NFPA 211. E. 3.2 Board Installation A. Install continuous vapor retarder on roof decks when dictated by NRCA procedures. B. Install board insulation in accordance with roofing system manufacturer s written instructions, meeting FM requirements, and complying with all local and Florida State Building codes, including Miami-Dade County uplift requirements. C. Insulation Thickness and Placement: 1. Board insulation shall be installed in not less than two layers. 2. Where tapered insulation is required, thickness at the low point shall be not less than 1 ½ inches. 3. Break joints of succeeding layers of board insulation with those in preceding layer. 4. Lay units with long dimension perpendicular to the rolled direction of the roofing membrane. 5. Seal all cut edges at penetrations and at edges against blocking with roofing cement. 6. Cover all insulation installed on the same day. D. Installation Method: 1. Mechanically Fasten: To resist uplift requirements for local and Florida State building codes, including Miami-Dade uplift requirements. E. Cover Board: When required by roofing manufacturer install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with staggered end joints. Offset cover board joints from insulation joints a minimum of 6 inches. Install in same manner as insulation. 3.3 Batt / Blanket Installation A. Install batt / blanket insulation with tight joints and filling framing void completely. Seal cuts, tears, and unlapped joints with tape. B. Fasten batt / blanket insulation between framing with nails or staples through flanged edges on face of framing. Space fastenings not more than six inches apart. C. Roof rafter or floor joist insulation: Place mineral fiber blankets between framing to provide not less than a two inch air space between insulation and roof sheathing or subfloor. D. Ceiling insulation: Fasten batt / blanket insulation between framing members with nails or staples through flanged edges of insulation. 3.4 Loose Fill Installation A. Install insulation in accordance with ASTM C1015. B. Do not install insulation until the all defects identified in the examination paragraph above have been corrected and their cause eliminated. C. Pneumatic installation of loose fill insulation shall comply with OSHA. Supply and utilize the personnel protective equipment and engineering controls necessary for a safe effective installation. Use only pneumatic equipment in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. D. Install the insulation allowing it to settle to its natural density. Do not tamp or rod the insulation. E. Install insulation in sufficient depth to provide the thermal value indicated in the Scope of Work Writ up. F. For pneumatic installations, use the least air pressure meeting the manufacturer s instructions. G. Do not blow the insulation into electrical devices and vents which open into the attic and other spaces to be insulated. 3.5 Protection of Finished Work A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION

86 Asphalt Shingle Roofing SECTION ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Attic ventilation. C. Underlayment. D. Associated metal flashings and accessories. 1.2 References A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM D226 Asphalt Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. ASTM D2178 Asphalt Glass Felt used in Roofing and Waterproofing C. ASTM D3018 Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules D. ASTM D4586 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. E. ASTM F1667 Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples F. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - MS104 NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Roofing Materials and Systems Directory. H. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. B. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings, indicate specially configured metal flashings. C. Samples: Provide samples of standard colors of metal flashings, edge trim, shingles, etc., indicating color range and finish/texture/pattern for color selection. D. Manufacturer s Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures. E. Manufacturer s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of the NRCA Steep Roofing manual. B. Products required to comply with fire resistance criteria: UL listed and labeled. C. Comply with all state and local building codes for roofing materials, installation, and inspections. 1.5 Environmental Requirements A. Do not install shingles, underlayment, or protection membranes when surface temperatures are below 45 degrees F. 1.6 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver materials in manufacturer s unopened bundles or containers with the manufacturer s brand and name clearly marked thereon. B. Shingle bundle wrapping shall bear the label of Underwriters laboratories, Inc. C. Store shingles in accordance with manufacturer s printed instructions. Store roll goods on end in an upright position. D. Keep materials dry, covered completely, and protected from the weather. Part 2 Products 2.1 Shingles: Minimum 30 year warranty, Architectural shingle, Class A self-sealing; fungus resistant fiberglass strip shingle roofing over manufacturer s approved underlayment based on slope of roof. A. Conforming to ASTM D3018 Type I Self Sealing; UL certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D316 / UL mph Wind Resistance and UL Class A Fire Resistance; and complying with local and Florida Building Codes. B. Shingles comprised of a glass fiber mat base with ceramically colored UV resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; algae resistant copper coated granules with a weight of 205 pounds per square. C. Utilize shingle manufacturer s recommended eave, valley, ridge, etc., protection.

87 Asphalt Shingle Roofing D. Acceptable shingle manufacturers include Certain-Teed, GAF, Owens Corning, or approved equal. 1. Color to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer s standard colors. 2.2 Attic Ventilation: Type accepted by roofing manufacturer and installed according manufacturer s recommendations, as specified, and according to federal, state, and local building codes, whichever is stricter. A. Unless otherwise indicated provide one square foot of net free vent area per 150 square feet of attic area to be vented. B. Provide one square foot of net free vent area per 300 square feet of attic area to be vented when the ventilation is balanced between the lower (eave) and upper (ridge) portion of the attic such that a minimum of 40% and no more than 50% of the required net free vent area is provided in the upper portion of the attic. C. All openings greater than 1/8 inch must be screened to prevent insect penetration and louvered to protect against the entrance of rain and snow. 2.3 Underlayment: Type accepted by roofing shingle manufacturer and installed according to local and Florida Building Code subsections and Two layers of underlayment are required when roof slope is less than 4 inches rise in 12 inches. Shingle manufacturer s recommended eave, valley, ridge, etc., protection shall be utilized. A. Fiberglass Felt: ASTM D2178. B. Organic Felt: ASTM D226, Type 1. C. Modified Bitumen: ASTM D Flashing, Edge / Rake Trim, etc. A. Extruded aluminum complying with ASTM B221, not less than inch (2mm) thick with two coat fluoropolymer finish or approved equal. 2.5 Fasteners A. Roofing Nails: As approved by roofing manufacturer and compliant with local and Florida State building codes. 1. ASTM F1667; Type 1, Style 20 galvanized steel, deformed shanks, with heads 3/8 inch to 7/16 inch diameter. 2. Use nails 1 ¼ inches long for shingles and ¾ inch long for felt. 2.5 Accessories A. Plastic Cement: ASTM D45856, Type 1. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning Work of this Section. B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners and meeting local and state building codes. C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface. D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed. E. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids. 3.2 Preparation A. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch with deck tape. B. At areas where eave protection is to be adhered to substrate, fill knots holes and surface cracks with latex filler. C. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection. D. Install eave edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 6 inches on center. E. Roof accessories, vent pipes, attic vents, and other projections through the roof must be in place and roof flashing installed or ready for installation before laying shingles. 3.3 Fabrication of Metal Work A. Form all metal work true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form all metal work in longest possible lengths. Prefinished extruded shapes are preferred. C. Hem exposed edges of all metal work on underside ½ inch; miter and seam corners.

88 Asphalt Shingle Roofing D. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward ¼ inch and hemmed to form drip. E. Seal all metal joints. 3.4 Installation A. Install manufacturer s recommended eave, valley, ridge, etc., protection in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and in accordance with local and state building codes. 1. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 4 feet up slope beyond interior face of exterior wall. B. Install shingle manufacturer accepted underlayment according to local and state building codes. Two layers of underlayment are required when roof slope is less than 4 inches rise in 12 inches. 1. Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement items projecting through or mounted on roof. C. At eaves and rakes, install metal drip edges. Apply the metal drip edge directly over the underlayment and install according to shingle manufacturer s recommendations and local and state building codes to maintain required roofing warranties. D. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and local and state building codes. 1. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves. 2. Project first course of shingles ¾ inch beyond fascia boards. 3. Extend shingles ½ inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards. 4. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. E. Install metal flashing at the intersections of roofs, adjoining walls, or projections through the deck such as chimneys and vent stacks. Give careful attention to the installation of all flashings to provide a complete and watertight roofing system. 1. When flashing into a masonry wall, insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Pack remaining spaces with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant. 2. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. 3. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. 4. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. F. Ridge: Utilize shingle manufacturer s recommended ridge cap/shingle, installed according to manufacturer s directions and complying with local and state building codes. G. Gutters and Downspouts: Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. 1. Slope gutters ¼ inch per foot minimum. 2. Direct downspout discharge away from building and walkways. 3. Size gutters and downspouts to area of roof per SMACNA guidelines. END OF SECTION

89 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing SECTION MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Modified bituminous roofing membrane, conventional application. B. Deck sheathing. C. Base flashings. D. Roofing accessories. 1.2 References A. ASTM D41 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. B. ASTM D312 Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. C. ASTM D6164 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements. D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - ML104 NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. E. US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) EPA 600/R13/116 Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials. F. Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC): CRRC Product Rating Program 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer s product data for membrane and bitumen materials, base flashing materials, and surfacing. 1. Manufacturer s Installation Instructions: Highlight any special procedures required for this project. 2. Manufacturer s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer s Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed. 4. Manufacturer s Certificate(s) indicating compliance with local, State, and Miami-Dade County requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Provide manufacturer s drawings for standard details, indicating how they will be used for project and modifications necessary due to alternative conditions. Indicate interface with other materials. C. Samples: Submit 2 samples (6 x 6 inches) illustrating granule surfaced sheet. D. Installer s qualification data is to be submitted with Bids. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer. 1. Submit Contractor s Roofing Warranty, Section Quality Assurance and Control A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer s instructions. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with all applicable State of Florida licenses and insurance. C. Product / Material Qualifications: 1. Obtain products from single manufacturer or from sources recommended by manufacturer for use with roofing system and incorporated in manufacturer s warranty. 2. Provide manufacturer s certification that field applied bituminous coatings and mastics, and field applied roof coatings comply with limits for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) per the National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural coatings. 1.5 Performance Requirements A. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

90 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing B. Roofing System Energy Performance Requirements: Provide a roofing system identical to components that have been successfully tested by a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to meet the following requirements: 1. Energy Performance: Meet the requirements established by Energy Star and initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC Pre-Installation Meeting A. Convene one week before starting Work of this Section. Meeting will be held at the job site and shall be attended by the Contractor, Subcontractor (if any), designated HCD personnel, and Owner. B. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related Work. 1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Protection A. Deliver products in manufacturer s original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. 1.8 Project Conditions A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated flashings and cvounter flashings as the Work of this Section proceeds. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 1.9 Warranty A. See Section for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five (5) year period after the issuance date of the final payment on the Project. C. Provide twenty year manufacturer s material and labor warranty to cover failure to prevent penetration of water. Part 2 Products 2.1 Manufacturers: A. CertainTeed Basis of Design B. GAF - product meeting or exceeding criteria specified and Basis of Design. C. Siplast - product meeting or exceeding criteria specified and Basis of Design. D. Or approved equal product meeting or exceeding criteria specified and Basis of Design. 2.2 Roofing Conventional Application A. Modified Bituminous Roofing: Two ply roofing membrane system - mechanically fastened base ply and self adhered cap sheet. 2.3 Membrane, Sheet Materials, and Adhesives A. Base Ply: Basis of Design, CertainTeed Flintastic SA Nailbase 1. SBS Modified Bitumen, meeting ASTM D4601, Type II and CGSB 37 GP-56M Type 2b, Class C, Grade Thickness: 60 mils per ASTM D Tensile Strength: 65 / 40 lbs/inch per ASTM 73 degrees F MD/XD. 4. Elongation: 6% /5 % per ASTM 73 degrees F MD/XD. B. Cap Sheet: Basis of Design, CertainTeed Flintastic SA Cap CoolStar 1. SBS Modified Bitumen, meeting ASTM D6164, Grade G, Type 1, D7505 and CGSB37, GP-56m, Type 1a, Class A, Grade Thickness: 160 mils. 3. Tensile Strength per ASTM D5147: a. At /- 3.6 degrees F MD/XD: 80 / 55 lbs / inch. b. At 0 =/- 3.6 degrees F MD/XD: 115 / 90 lbs / inch.

91 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing Elongation per ASTM D5147: a. At 73.4 =/- 3.6 degrees F MD/XD: 60% / 65% b. At 0 =/- 3.6 degrees F MD/XD: 40% / 40%. 5. Dimensional Stability: 0.5% per ASTM D Low Temperature Flex: 0 degrees F per ASTM D Tear Strength: 110 / 80 lbs at 73.4 =/- 3.6 degrees F per ASTM D Top Surface: Highly reflective CoolStar granules (Energy Star approved). 9. Initial Solar Reflectance: CRRC and ASTM E Aged Solar Reflectance: CRRC and ASTM E CRRC Thermal Emittance: Modified Bitumen Coating: Non-oxidized (flux) asphalt, blended with elastomeric styrenebutadiene-styrene (SBS) polymer. 13. Support Mat: High performance, puncture and tear resistant non-woven polyester and fiber glass scrim combination mat. 2.4 Bituminous Materials A. Primer: ASTM D41, asphalt type, as approved by roofing manufacturer. B. Adhesive: ASTM D4479, Type II, as approved by roofing manufacturer. 2.5 Attic Ventilation: Type accepted by roofing manufacturer and installed according manufacturer s recommendations, as specified, and according to federal, state, and local building codes, whichever is stricter; when attic space exists. A. Unless otherwise indicated provide one square foot of net free vent area per 150 square feet of attic area to be vented. B. Provide one square foot of net free vent area per 300 square feet of attic area to be vented when the ventilation is balanced between the lower (eave) and upper (ridge) portion of the attic such that a minimum of 40% and no more than 50% of the required net free vent area is provided in the upper portion of the attic. C. All openings greater than 1/8 inch must be screened to prevent insect penetration and louvered to protect against the entrance of rain and snow. 2.6 Flashing, Edge / Rake Trim, etc. A. Extruded aluminum complying with ASTM B221, not less than inch (2mm) thick with two coat fluoropolymer finish or approved equal. 2.7 Accessories A. Cant and Edge Strips: Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard, compatible with roofing material; cants formed to 45 degree angle. B. Sealants: As recommended by roofing manufacturer. C. Fasteners: As recommended by roofing manufacturer and compliant with local and Florida building codes. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive Work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. Sweep decks to broom clean condition. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are in place. F. Remove projections that might damage roofing materials. 3.2 Wood Deck Preparation A. Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Fill knot holes with latex filler. B. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum. C. Replace any damaged or missing decking. Match existing decking in material and thickness.

92 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing D. Prepare decking as required by roofing membrane manufacturer to provide specified warranty. E. When indicated in the Scope of Work Write Up, install roof deck insulation and cover board per Section F. Roof accessories, vent pipes, attic vents, and other projections through the roof must be in place and roof flashing installed or ready for installation before laying shingles. 3.3 Membrane Application A. Mechanically attach base ply membrane and self-adhered cap membrane in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and compliant with all local and Florida State building codes. B. All plies of membrane roofing shall be installed smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, fish-mouths, or tears. Ensure full bond of membrane to substrate. C. All membrane installation shall include lapped and sealed edges, with ends permanently waterproof. D. At end of day s operation, install waterproof cut-off. Remove cut-off before resuming roofing operations. E. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Insert base flashing into reglets secure and counter flash. F. Around roof penetrations, mop in and seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing. G. Coordinate installation of roofing and historic scupper, drain locations and related flashings. H. Roof Edges and Terminations: 1. Where nailers occur at roof edges or penetrations to receive metal base flashing, apply a continuous strip of underlayment over the nailers before the first ply sheet is applied. 2. After membrane is installed turn the underlayment back over the roofing, and secure in place with cold applied adhesive before installation of metal edges extending out onto the membrane are installed. 3. Where cants occur (at vertical surfaces), cut off roofing sheets tow inches above top of cant strips, except where roof accessories have integral cants, extend membrane over cant and up vertical surface to top of curb or nailer. 4. Where fascia-cant occurs at roof edges, extend membrane beyond outside cant face and cut off at outside after base flashing is installed. 5. Where reglet occurs at vertical surfaces, extend plies roofing sheets up into reglet and full depth of the reglet. I. Base Flashing: 1. Provide built-up base flashing over cants as necessary to make Work watertight. 2. Apply flashing on top of roofing, up face of cant and up the face of the vertical surface at least 8 inches above the roofing but not more than 14 inches above the roofing, generally full height beneath counter flashing or top of curb flashing. a. At fascia-cants, extend to top of cant and cut off at top of cant. b. At reglet, extend full depth into the reglet. 3. Use two plies of modified bituminous sheet. a. Extend the first ply four inches out on the roofing, and the second ply three inches beyond the first ply. Lap ends three inches with joints broken 18 inches in each ply. Use smooth surface modified bituminous sheet for first ply. b. Use granular surfaced modified bitumen cap sheet for second ply. 4. Set base flashing in a solid application of cold-applied adhesive. a. Set cap sheet in cold applied adhesive with laps sealed with cold applied adhesive. b. Except for venting roof edges, seal the top edge of the base flashing with roof cement. 5. Except at metal fascia cants, secure top edge of base flashing with nails on a line approximately one inch below top edge, spaced not more than eight inches on center. a. Cover nail heads with roof cement. b. Cover the top of the base flashing with metal counter flashing. c. At the fascia cants secure the top edge of the flashing with fascia compression clamps. 3.4 Cleaning

93 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by bitumen or other source of soiling caused by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and confirm to their documented instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by Work of this Section. 3.5 Protection of Finished Work A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. END OF SECTION

94 Gutters and Downspouts SECTION GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Gutters and downspouts B. Accessories 1.2 References A. ASTM A653: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. B. ASTM A792: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 percent Aluminum Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process. C. ASTM A924: Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip Process. D. ASTM B370: Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data and sizing calculation. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the production of sheet metal gutters and downspouts. B. Installer Qualifications: Install shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience installing gutters and downspouts to be installed on this Project. 1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Store materials on dry, level, firm, and clean surface. Part 2 Products 2.1 Materials A. Coil Stock: Match composition of roof flashing to prevent galvanic reaction. 1. Steel: G90 galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A653 and A Aluminum: Formed and coated aluminum coil stock; 3105H Gutters A. K Style Gutter Fabrication: 1. Sized for capacity of roof area, in no case smaller than existing gutters being replaced. 2. Length: Continuous and seamless. 3. Thickness: Steel 24 gauge; Aluminum inch. 4. Corners: Provide mitered corners, lapped, sealed and riveted. Corners shall extend a minimum of 12 inches from the corner in each direction. Lap joint and sealant where connecting to continuous gutter. Match material, shape and finish of gutter. 2.3 Downspouts A. Rectangular Downspout Fabrication: 1. Sized for capacity of roof and flow from gutters, in no case smaller than existing downspouts being replaced. 2. Length: Continuous one piece to fit existing conditions. 3. Texture: Corrugated. 4. Material Thickness: Steel 24 gauge; Aluminum inch. 2.4 Accessories A. End Caps: match Material, shape and finish of gutter. B. Outlet Tubes: Match material and shape of downspout. C. Gutter Guard: Provide leaf guard over open gutters. D. Gutter Support: 1. Hidden Gutter Hanger: Manufacturer s standard hidden hanger matching gutter material. E. Downspout Support:

95 Gutters and Downspouts Exposed Strap: Matching downspout material, finish, and color. 2. Miscellaneous downspout components: Provide all necessary elbows, downspout offset sections, and pop rivets as required for a complete installation. All miscellaneous components shall match downspouts. F. Fasteners: Of sufficient length to penetrate minimum 1 inch into substrate. Material to match gutters and downspouts to prevent galvanic reaction. G. Sealants: Tripolymer, single component sealant as recommended by manufacturer at gutter joints. H. Splash pans: Precast concrete. I. Downspout extensions: 43 inch, or greater, low profile downspout extension to control flow of water away from structures. 2.5 Finish A. Exterior Coating: Silicon Modified Polyester (SMP) applied to exposed side. Color shall be white, ivory, or bronze, unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior coating: Manufacturer s standard primer wash coat. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Preparation A. Verify that substrates are in place and ready for installation of gutters and downspouts. 3.2 Installation A. Install work securely in place and provide for expansion and contraction of components using lapped and sealed joints. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action through the use of bituminous coating or other permanent separation recommended by SMACNA. D. Space expansion joints in gutters as recommended by manufacturer. E. Rivet joints where required for strength, exposed rivet shall match gutter or downspout color. F. Torch cutting of components is not allowed. G. Gutters: 1. Install gutter supports at no more than 24 inches on center. 2. Slope gutters evenly to downspouts; proved end caps at gutter ends and seal watertight per manufacturer s instructions. 3. Install outlet tubes at all downspout locations, seal watertight. 4. Apply joint sealants at gutter joints in manufacturer s installation instructions. 5. Install leaf guard system. H. Downspouts: 1. Install downspouts, provide elbows and offsets, and secure downspouts to wall construction using downspout supports spaced no more than 10 feet on center. Maximum distance of downspout support from top or bottom of downspout shall be 2 feet. Provide a 45 degree elbow at bottom of downspout to direct water away from wall surface or foundation. 2. Install splash pans under downspouts. 3.3 Cleaning and Protection A. Remove damaged, defective or improperly installed materials. Replace with new materials installed per requirements of this Section. B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer s written instructions; maintain clean condition. END OF SECTION

96 Joint Sealants SECTION JOINT SEALANTS Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Sealants 1. Sealing of joints in exterior envelope to prevent the entry or escape of water or air. 2. Sealing joints on the interior of the building to prevent the passage of water or air from space to space or between adjacent building materials. 3. Joints of a nature similar to that of joints indicated shall be sealed with same sealer, whether or not specifically indicated or scheduled to be sealed. B. Joint Backing 1.2 References A. ASTM C717 Standard Terminology of Building Seals and Sealants. B. ASTM C834 Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. D. ASTM C Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants. E. ASTM C 1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. F. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI) The Professionals Guide H. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 40 CFR 59 National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products. 1.3 Definitions A. M Type Substrates: Cast-in-place concrete, concrete masonry units, clay brick, masonry mortar, natural stone. B. G Type Substrates: Glass and transparent plastic glazing sheets. C. A Type Substrates: Metals, porcelain, glazed tile, and smooth plastics. D. O Type Substrates: Wood, unglazed tile, substrates not included under other categories. E. T Type Substrates: Surfaces bearing pedestrian or vehicular traffic. F. NT Type Substrate: Non-traffic bearing surfaces. 1.4 Submittals A. Product Data: Provide listing of products to be used and manufacturer s data for each joint sealer, indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, color availability, and installation instructions. 1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver materials in original containers or bundles with labels showing manufacturer, product name or designation, color, shelf life, and installation instructions. 1.6 Project Site Conditions A. Environmental Limitations: do not install sealants if any of the following conditions exist: B. Dimensional Limitations: do not install sealers if joint dimensions are less than or greater than that recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. Part 2 Products 2.1 Sealants A. High Movement Silicone Sealant: One- or two-part, ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, plus movement capability of 50 percent in extension, 50 percent in compression. 1. Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation Dow Corning 790 or 795. B. Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: One-part ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, formulated with fungicide for interior use on nonporous substrates.

97 Joint Sealants Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation Dow Corning 786. C. Butyl sealant: 1. Products: Comply with ASTM C1311. a. Tremco Butyl Sealant. D. One-part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: a. Bostic Chem-Calk 900. b. Pecora Corporation Dynatrol I-XL. c. Sika Corporation Sikaflex 1a. d. Sonneborn BASF Building Products Sonolastic NP 1. E. Pedestrian Paving Joints and Interior Floor Joints: 1. One-Part Pourable Urethane Sealant for Traffic bearing use (T): a. Products: 1. Bostic Chem Calk Pecora Corporation Urexpan NR Sonneborn BASF Building Products Sonolastic SL Multipart Pourable Urethane Sealant for Traffic bearing use (T): a. Products: 1. Pecora Corporation Urexpan NR Sika Corporation Sikaflex 2c SL 3. Sonneborn BASF Building Products Sonolastic SL Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Traffic bearing use (T): a. Products: 1. Pecora Corporation Dynatred. 2. Sika Corporation Sikaflex 1a. F. Latex Sealants: 1. Acrylic Latex Emulsion Sealant: One-part, nonsag, mildew resistant, paintable, complying with ASTM C834. a. Products: 1. Bostik Chem-Calk Pecora Corporation AC-20 + Silicone. 3. Sonneborn BASF Building Products Sonolac. 2.2 Accessories A. Primer: Nonstaining type, as recommended by joint sealant manufacturer. B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; not damaging to substrates, and compatible with joint forming materials. C. Backer Rods: Flexible, nonabsorbent, compressible polyurethane foam, either open cell or nongassing closed cell, unless otherwise restricted by sealant manufacturer; preformed to appropriate size and shape. D. Bond Breaker Tape: Self adhesive, polyethylene or other plastic tape, unless otherwise restricted by sealant manufacturer; suitable for preventing sealant adhesion. E. Masking Tape: nonabsorbent, nonstaining. F. Tooling Agents: Approved by sealant manufacturer; nonstaining to sealant and substrate. G. Weep / Vent Products: Round plastic tubing; medium density polyethylene of thickness appropriate to joint. 2.3 Sealant Colors A. Sealant colors are to be selected from manufacturer s full range of available colors for each respective sealant and adjacent substrate to match adjacent substrates final color. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination

98 Joint Sealants A. Examine joints for characteristics that may affect sealant performance, including configuration and dimensions. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant and substrate. C. Coordinate for repair and resolution of unsound substrate materials. D. Inspect for uniform joint widths and that dimensions are within tolerance established by sealant manufacturer. 3.2 Preparation A. Prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and SWRI. B. Cleaning: Just before starting sealant installation, clean joints as follows: 1. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant including, but not limited to, dust, dirt, coatings, paint, oil, and grease. 2. Dry out damp and wet substrates thoroughly. 3. Clean A-type and G-type substrates by chemical or other methods that will not damage the substrate. 4. Remove loose particles by brushing and by blowing with oil-free compressed air. 5. Use methods which will not leave residues that will impair adhesion. 6. Concrete: Remove laitance and form-release coatings. 7. Do not cut or damage joint edges. C. Prime joint substrates where required by manufacturer s recommendations. 1. Apply primer prior to installation of back-up rod or bond breaker tape. 2. Use brush or other approved means that will reach all parts of joints. Avoid application to or spillage onto adjacent substrate surfaces. D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to keep primers and sealants off of adjacent surfaces which would be damaged by contract or by cleanup. Remove tape at the end of each day. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Protect elements surrounding the Work of this Section from damage or disfigurement. F. Install fillers where needed to provide proper joint depth or support for sealant backers. G. Do not begin joint sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 Installation A. Backers: 1. Install backing material, to form joints enclosed on three sides as required for specified depth of sealant. 2. Where deep joints occur, install filler to fill space behind the backing rod and position the rod at proper depth. 3. Cut fillers to proper depth for installation of backing rod and sealants. 4. Install backing rod, without puncturing the material, to a uniform depth, within plus or minus 1/9 inch of sealant depth specified. 5. Where space for backing rod does not exist, install bond breaker tape strip at bottom (or back) of joint so sealant bonds only to two opposing surfaces. 6. Install backers at depth required to result in shape and depth of installed sealant which allows the most joint movement without failure. a. Make backers continuous, without gaps, tears, or punctures. B. Sealants: 1. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. 2. Comply with sealant manufacturer s installation instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified. 3. Gunnable and Pourable Sealants: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C Apply sealants only when ambient temperature is between 40 and 100 degrees F. 5. Do not install sealant type listed by manufacturer as not suitable for use in locations specified.

99 Joint Sealants Avoid dropping or smearing sealant on adjacent surfaces. 7. Apply sealants with nozzle size to fit joint width. 8. Shape and Depth: Use methods recommended by manufacturer; completely fill the joint; make full contact with bond surfaces; tool nonsag sealants to smooth surface eliminating air pockets. a. Use concave joint shape shown in Figure 8 in ASTM C1193, where not otherwise indicated. b. Depth of sealant at center of joint, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents or recommended by manufacturer: 1. For joints up to ¼ inch wide: Depth equal to width. 2. For joints ¼ inch to ½ inch wide: Depth equal to ¼ inch. 3. For joints over ½ inch wide: Depth equals to ½ the width but not deeper than ½ inch. c. Contact depth: Twice the depth of sealant at cent of joint, unless otherwise required. 3.4 Field Quality Control A. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. B. Replace sealant which is improperly installed or damaged during construction process. 3.5 Cleaning A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces adjacent to joints as Work progresses and before sealants set using methods and materials approved by manufacturers of sealants and of surfaces to be cleaned. B. Leave adjacent surfaces in a clean and unstained condition. 3.6 Protection of Finished Work A. Protect sealants from contamination and damage until cured. B. Remove and replace damaged sealants. 3.7 Schedule A. General 1. Seal joints in exterior envelope to prevent the entry or escape of water or air, prior to painting. 2. Seal joints on the interior of the building to prevent the passage of water or air from space to space or between adjacent building materials and assemblies, prior to painting. 3. Joints of a nature similar to that of joints indicated shall be sealed with same sealer, whether specifically indicated to be sealed or not, unless the Project does not include work in that area. B. Typical Exterior Joints: 1. Including, but not limited to, wall joints, joints around perimeter of frames, joints around pipes, ducts, conduit penetrating exterior walls, joints in wash surfaces of precast concrete, cast stone, cut stone, or concrete or brick masonry, and exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. 2. Use high movement silicone sealant unless otherwise indicated. C. Metal Flashings: 1. Including, but not limited to, joints in flashing, edge trim, fascia, coping, where flashing is inserted into reglet in wall, top edge of surface mounted reglets, and between these items and adjacent construction. 2. Use high movement silicone sealant. D. Exterior door Thresholds: Set thresholds in butyl sealant. E. Typical Interior Joints: 1. Including, but not limited to: a. Between walls or partitions and adjacent casework, fixed shelving, fixed equipment, lighting fixtures, etc. b. Between concrete or masonry or other material and the perimeters of frames of doors, windows, access panels, etc. c. Between hollow metal jambs and resilient flooring. d. Around penetrations such as electrical boxes, plumbing, cabinets, ducts, and other openings in concrete or masonry walls or partitions. Comply with recommendations and details in USG Corporation s Gypsum Construction Handbook. e. Interior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. 2. Use acrylic emulsion latex sealant.

100 Joint Sealants Between concrete or masonry walls or partitions and adjacent columns, pilasters, walls, partitions, floors, ceilings, or other construction use: One-part, nonsag urethane sealant. F. Joints in Interior Wet Areas: 1. Including, but not limited to, toilet rooms, bathrooms, break rooms, kitchens, and between walls or other surfaces and adjacent plumbing fixtures, fittings, and casework. 2. Use mildew resistant silicone sealant. G. Joints in Floor or Wall Tile: 1. Including locations specified in Section Use urethane sealant, Use T for floor joints, use NT for wall joints. 3. Backer: Backer rod. 4. Joint shape: Flush joint configuration. 5. Color: Match adjacent grout color, unless otherwise indicated. H. Pedestrian Paving Joints and Interior Floor Joints: 1. Use urethane sealant for Use T. 2. Use bond breaker tape. 3. Backer: Joint filler as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 4. Joint shape: Flush joint configuration. END OF SECTION

101 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames SECTION HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Hollow Metal Doors. B. Steel Frames. 1.2 References A. ANSI A205 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. (SDI 100) B. ANSI A250 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel doors and Frames. C. ASTM E2074 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies. D. Door Hardware Institute (DHI) - DHI A115 Series, Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware. (ANSI / DHI A115 Series) E. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire doors and fire windows. F. NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. G. Steel Door Institute (SDI) SDI 113, Thermal Transmittance of Steel door and Frame Assemblies. H. UL Building Materials Directory. 1.3 Quality assurance A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with a minimum of five years documented experience. 1.4 Delivery, Storage, and Protection A. Protect with resilient packaging. B. Avoid humidity build up under coverings. C. Prevent Corrosion. Part 2 Products 2.1 General A. Requirements for all hollow metal doors: B. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standards. C. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.2 Hollow Metal Doors A. Exterior Doors: 1. Primary Doors: Smooth or embossed, two panel, non-fire rated, hollow steel composite door a. Thickness: 1 ¾ inch. b. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, 16 ga., physical performance Level A, Model 3, Stile and Rail. c. Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. d. Core: Polystyrene Core Doors shall be reinforced by laminating face skins to a foam core slab of expanded polystyrene. Core shall have 1 lb to 1.25 lb per cubic foot density. e. Factory galvanized and primed for final field painting. 2. Secondary Doors: Smooth, non-fire rated, hollow steel composite door. a. Thickness: 1 ¾ inch. b. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, 18 ga., physical performance Level B, Model 1, Full Flush. c. Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. d. Texture: Smooth faces.

102 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames f. Core: Polystyrene Core Doors shall be reinforced by laminating face skins to a foam core slab of expanded polystyrene. Core shall have 1 lb to 1.25 lb per cubic foot density. g. Factory galvanized and primed for final field painting. B. Interior Doors: 1. Smooth, non-fire rated, hollow steel composite door. 2. Thickness: 1 3/8 inch. 3. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, 20 ga., physical performance Level C, Model 1, Full Flush. 4. Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 5. Core: Kraft Paper Honeycomb 6. Texture: Smooth faces. 7. Factory primed for final field painting. 2.3 Metal Frames A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. 2. Finish: same as for door. B. Exterior Door Frames: 1. Face welded, with smooth joint. 2. Frame Thickness: inches. C. Interior Door Frames: 1. Slip on for gypsum board partitions. Joints shall be finished smooth. 2. Frame Thickness: inches. 2.4 Accessory Materials A. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole - 3 on strike side of single door. B. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory or shop assembled frames. C. Anchors: Appropriate to the wall type of installation. 2.5 Finish Materials A. Galvanizing: All components hot dipped zinc-iron alloy coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653A / 63M, with A60/ZF180 coating. Factory prime galvanized units. 1. Galvanize exterior units. B. Primer: Rust inhibitor, complying with ANSI A205.10, door manufacturer s standard. 2.6 Examination A. Verify existing conditions before starting Work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 2.7 Preparation 2.8 Installation A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Coordinate installation of hardware. 2.9 Erection tolerances A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner Adjusting A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION

103 Flush Wood Doors SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS Part 1 General 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Interior flush wood doors. 2. Pre-fitting by manufacturer. 3. Pre-machining by manufacturer. 1.2 References A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards. B. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) WDMA, I.S.1A Architectural Wood Flush Doors. 1.3 Submittals A. Provide example door for approval by Owner at job location. Example door shall match existing doors in appearance, coloring, size, finish, etc. 1.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver, store, and handle products as required to prevent damage or deterioration. Conform to manufacturer s recommendations, requirements of referenced standard, and recommendations of WDMA, I.S.1A Appendix, How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors. B. Do not deliver, store, or install products of this Section before building s design temperature and humidity levels have been achieved and will be maintained at those levels. Part 2 Products 2.1 Wood Doors: Masonite is the basis of design. A. Faces: Wood veneer or to match existing doors at Project. B. Substrate: Wood veneer plywood. C. Core: Kraft corrugated paper with particleboard lockblocks. D. Stiles: Mill option solid softwood. E. Rails: Mill option wood. F. Adhesives: Type2 containing no urea-formaldehyde. G. Thickness: 1 3/8 H. Performance: Meets or exceeds AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, including Section 1300, Architectural Flush Doors. I. Finish: Transparent, WDMA / AWS System 9-UV cured catalyzed polyurethane finish in colors to match existing or approved equal, unless otherwise specified. 1. Give top and bottom edge of doors two coats of catalyzed polyurethane or water resistant sealer before sealing in shipping containers. 2.2 Fabrication A. Fabricate to provide consistent clearances. B. Hinge and lock edges: Provide 1/8 inch standard bevel at edges unless standard bevel would not precisely match hardware bevel. Provide proper bevel for hardware. C. Make neat mortises and cutouts for door hardware. D. Pre-fitting: Fabricate and trim doors to size at factory when possible. E. Pre-machining: Make all mortises and cutouts required for hardware at the factory to conform hardware templates, when possible. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Inspect door frames and doors before beginning door installation. 1. Verify that frames are properly installed and aligned and are capable of providing trouble free support for doors throughout range of door swing.

104 Flush Wood Doors B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before installing products of this Section. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.2 Installation A. Hardware Installation: See Section B. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer s recommended procedures and requirements of referenced standards. C. Pre-fit Doors: Minimize field fitting to those procedures which are necessary to complete work unfinished during factory pre-fitting and to provide trouble free operation. D. Pre-fitting Clearances: 1. Door edge and head: 1/8 inch. 2. Door edge and jamb: 1/8 inch. 3. Door bottom edge and top surface of threshold: ¼ inch. 4. Door bottom edge and floor covering surface or finish (where threshold is not installed): 1/8 inch. 5. Meeting edges at pairs of doors: 1/8 inch total. E. Installation Clearances: Install doors so as to maintain pre-fitting clearances specified. 3.3 Finishing A. Transparent finish to match existing doors, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 Adjusting A. Adjust doors for proper operation; coordinate with hardware adjustment; replace doors that cannot be properly adjusted. B. Where door finishes are damaged during installation, restore in a manner that results in the door showing no evidence of the restoration. If refinished door cannot be made to match other doors, remove refinished door and replace with new conforming Work at the Contractor s expense. C. Protect installed Work. END OF SECTION

105 Shower Doors SECTION SHOWER DOORS Part 1 General 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Sliding doors for shower, framed. 1.2 Submittals A. Provide example door or parts and / or product literature for approval by Owner at job location. Example door shall match existing doors in appearance, coloring, size, finish, etc. 1.3 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver, store, and handle products as required to prevent damage or deterioration. Conform to manufacturer s recommendations, requirements of referenced standard. Part 2 Products 2.1 Shower Doors: Alumax 650 Slider Shower Door Framed, is the basis of design. A. Fully adjustable, sealed, heavy duty ball bearing rollers. Up and down adjustment of panels is plus or minus.156 inches. B. Safety tee-lock wall jamb to header connection. C. Easy clean, self-draining tub track. D. Molded nylon panel guide of sufficient height to prevent the accidental dislodging of interior panel. E. Anti-jump header insert. F. Interior and exterior towel bars with molded clear polypropionate towel bar brackets and anti-reverse finger pulls. G. Reversible header design. H. Side, return, and side neo-angle panels as required to fit existing conditions of installation. I. Component Requirements 1. Alloy and Temper: Extruded aluminum shall be 6463-T6 alloy per ASTM B Hardness: Rockwell B scale T6 temper per ANSI Metal Gauge: Manufacturer s standard. 5. Tolerances: Aluminum extruded components shall comply with Aluminum Association requirements, unless otherwise specified. 6. Hardware: All hardware parts that are incorporated in the product shall be of aluminum, stainless steel or other corrosion resistant material(s) compatible with ASTM A or ASTM! Nickel or chrome plated parts, where used, shall be in compliance with ASTM B456.71, SC2. Stainless material should have a preference of a 310 alloy with a 410 alternative. a. Fasteners to follow International Fasteners Institute standard B for Slotted and Recessed Head Machine Screws and Metallic Drive Screws or B for Slotted and Recessed Head Tapping Screws and Metallic Drive Screws. b. Roller Bearings: Maximum load (2 bearings) 60 pounds, estimated life of bearing 75,000 cycles minimum. c. Towel Bar Bracket: 1. Specific Gravity: ASTM D Rockwell Hardness: ASTM D R scale 3. Tensile Strength at yield: ASTM D638 3,000 psi 4. Flexural Strength at yield: ASTM D790 4,400 psi 5. Izod impact at 73 degrees F, Notched: ASTM D foot pounds per inch. 6. Deformation under load at 1000 psi: ASTM D621 2% 7. Water Absorptions, 24 hr immersion: ASTM D % d. Panel Guide: 1. Tensile Strength: ASTM D638 16,500 psi

106 Shower Doors Break: ASTM D638 15% 3. Yield: ASTM D638 4 psi 4. Flexural Modulus at 73 degrees F: ASTM D ,000 psi 5. Izod Impact at 73 degrees F, Notched: ASTM D256 1 foot pound per inch 6. Deformation under load at 2000 psi: ASTM D % 7. Glazing Vinyls: Vinyls and other glazing seal materials shall be of material compatible with aluminum, be resistant to water and common household chemicals and shall create a water-tight seal between the glass and its surrounding frame. a. Mechanical Properties of Glazing Vinyl, Plasticized, filled with Shore A Durometer Hardness of Tensile Break Strength: 920 psi. 2. Ultimate Elongation: 600% 3. Specific Gravity 23/23 C: Shore A Hardness Initial and at10 seconds: 61 / Brittleness Point, F 50% Glazing Materials: All glazing materials to be safety tempered glass with a nominal thickness of.156 inc /.188 inch on obscure or clear framed panels or other safety glazing materials to conform to Federal Standard C)PSC 16 CFR 1201 Category 1 and 2, Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. Dimensional tolerances shall conform to ASTM C and ASTM C Finish Specifications (Anodized): Owner shall have option of finish from manufacturer s standard. The finish on anodized aluminum components shall conform to the following Aluminum Association Specifications: a. Silver: AA-M21-C31-A21 for buffed, clear, bright anodized aluminum. b. Gold: AA-M21-C31-A23 for buffed, colored, bright anodized aluminum. c. Brushed Nickel: AA-=M35-C31-A23 for brushed, colored, bright anodized aluminum. d. Satin: AA-M10-C22-A21 for etched, clear, anodized aluminum. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Inspect door frames and doors before beginning door installation. 1. Verify that frames are properly installed and aligned and are capable of providing trouble free support for doors throughout range of door operation. B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before installing products of this Section. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.2 Installation A. Hardware Installation: Per manufacturer s directions. B. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer s recommended procedures and requirements of referenced standards. C. Clearances: Doors shall provide a watertight seal. 3.3 Adjusting A. Adjust doors for proper operation; coordinate with hardware adjustment; replace doors that cannot be properly adjusted. B. Where door finishes are damaged during installation, restore in a manner that results in the door showing no evidence of the restoration. If refinished door cannot be made to match other doors, remove refinished door and replace with new conforming Work at the Contractor s expense. C. Protect installed Work. END OF SECTION

107 Aluminum Sliding Glass Patio Doors SECTION ALUMINUM SLIDING GLASS PATIO DOORS Part 1 General 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum sliding glass patio doors. 1.2 Submittals A. Provide example door or parts and / or product literature for approval by Owner at job location. Example door shall match existing doors in appearance, coloring, size, finish, etc. 1.3 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver, store, and handle products as required to prevent damage or deterioration. Conform to manufacturer s recommendations, requirements of referenced standard. Part 2 Products 2.1 Aluminum Sliding Glass Patio Doors: Lawson Industries, Inc Hurricane Guard Sliding Glass Door is the basis of design. Door and its installation are subject to continued acceptance by Florida Building Code certifications as well as compliance with Miami Dade County, Florida acceptance. A. All door members shall be commercial quality 6063 aluminum alloy to T5 and T6 temper. B. Tracks: Tracks shall be sloped exterior design with a 2 ¼ vertical riser as standard. C. Stiles and Rails: Door stiles shall be notched to allow top and bottom rails to telescope into stiles for maximum strength. Locking and fixed stiles to be of tubular design with minimum dimension of 2 5/8 inch x 1 ½ inches. Tubular interlock stiles shall have a minimum dimension of 2 ½ inch x 1 ½ inches. Both vertical stiles and horizontal rails are an assembly consisting of the base extrusion and a snap fitted aluminum glazing adaptor containing a compressible vinyl bulb, applied to the exterior of each panel member to conceal and protect the glazing rebate. Top of vertical door stiles shall be joined to horizontal rails using two #10 x ¾ inch sheet metal screws. Bottom door rails shall be joined to stile using one #10 x ¾ inch sheet metal screw. D. Finish: Doors, jambs and headers shall receive electro statically applied 1.0 mil dry film thickness coating which meets the performance requirements of A.A.M.A in a choice of bronze or white. All tracks and thresholds shall be finished. E. Hardware: Latch shall be surface mounted in white or black painted finish with integral interior and exterior pull handle. Positive acting thumb turn on interior will actuate steel mortise bolt. Latch housing shall contain adjustment feature, which will permit alteration of bolts travel, facilitating minute adjustments if necessary. Surface mounted hardened steel door keeper shall also provide for vertical adjustment. A high quality 5 pin cylinder key lock to actuate the door latch from the exterior is required. Bottom door rail shall contain two tandem roller assemblies, each assembly containing two 1 ¾ inch diameter ball bearing rollers, assembled with stainless steel inner and outer race. Each bottom rail shall have a 7/16 inch diameter access hole in its exterior surface that permits entry of adjustment tool which when turned will raise or lower door. Each adjustment hole shall be protected by a 7/16 inch diameter nylon port hole cover. F. Weather Stripping: Double weather stripping throughout unit shall be water resistant polypropylene pile, and virgin PVC vinyl. G. Screens: Furnish a screen for the operable panel of the doors. Vertical and horizontal members shall be tubular sections with spring loaded rollers in identical top and bottom rails for easy reversing. Positive action screen latch shall be self-reversing. Screen shall have effective insect proofing. All corners are jointed using 2 #8 x 1 ½ inch sheet metal screws. H. Test Data: Performance data shall comply with Florida Building Code for impact resistant products. I. Glass and Glazing: Doors shall be minimally glazed using 7/16 inch thick laminated glass consisting of one lite of 3/16 inch heat strengthened glass on inboard and outboard side and a.090 polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer.

108 Aluminum Sliding Glass Patio Doors Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Inspect door frames and doors before beginning door installation. 1. Verify that frames are properly installed and aligned and are capable of providing trouble free support for doors throughout range of door operation. B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before installing products of this Section. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.2 Installation A. Hardware Installation: Per manufacturer s directions. B. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer s recommended procedures and requirements of referenced standards. C. Clearances: Doors shall provide a watertight seal. 3.3 Adjusting A. Adjust doors for proper operation; coordinate with hardware adjustment; replace doors that cannot be properly adjusted. B. Where door finishes are damaged during installation, restore in a manner that results in the door showing no evidence of the restoration. If refinished door cannot be made to match other doors, remove refinished door and replace with new conforming Work at the Contractor s expense. C. Protect installed Work. END OF SECTION

109 Aluminum Windows SECTION ALUMINUM WINDOWS Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Single hung windows. 1.2 References A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) - AAMA / NWWDA 101 / I.S.2. B. ASTM F588 Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies. C. Glass Association of North America (GANA) GANA Glazing Manual 1.3 Performance Requirements A. All windows and installations must meet local and State of Florida Building Code requirements and be compliant with Miami-Dade County guidelines. B. All windows shall be white in color, unless otherwise indicated. C. Each operation sash must have a screen. D. All windows in bathrooms must have obscured glazing, tempered where required by local and State of Florida Building Codes. E. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Level 10 requirements when tested according to ASTM F588. F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage that accommodate thermal improvements of units resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, distortion, opening of joints, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads and stresses on glazing and connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1.4 Submittals A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, weather stripping, and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 Quality Assurance A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Glazing: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA s Glazing Manual unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.6 Project Conditions A. Field Measurements: Contractor shall be solely responsible to verify manufacturer s rough opening requirements and existing window opening sizes for all windows to be installed. 1. Contractor shall verify that windows meet the egress requirements of the local and State of Florida Building Code. 2. Contractor will be responsible for providing and complying with installation specifications, and product approval codes required by local and State of Florida Building Code. 1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Protection A. Deliver and store products and materials in manufacturer s sealed packages. Protect materials from damage and store in dry locations. B. Comply with manufacturer s written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. 1.8 Environmental Requirements A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.

110 Aluminum Windows Warranty A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Failure to meet performance requirements. 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 3. Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. 4. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. 5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 6. Insulating glass failure. B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of issuance of final payment for Project. Part 2 Products 2.1 Materials A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum window manufacturer to comply with performance requirements. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components which comply with performance requirements. Cadmium plated steel fasteners are not permitted. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than inch thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure and comply with performance requirements. Cadmium plated steel anchors, clips, and accessories are not permitted. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nickel / chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel for iron complying with ASTM B633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure and comply with performance requirements. Cadmium plated steel reinforcing members are not permitted. E. Compression Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping design for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when aluminum window is closed. 1. Weather Stripping Material: Elastomeric cellular preformed gaskets complying with ASTM C509 and performance requirements. 2. Weather Stripping Material: Dense elastomeric gaskets complying with ASTM C864 and performance requirements. 3. Weather Stripping Material: Manufacturer s standard system and materials complying with AAMA / NWWDA 101 / I.S.2 and performance requirements. F. Sliding Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701 / Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semi-rigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene coated material that complies with performance requirements. G. Replaceable Weather Seals: comply with AAMA 701 / 702.

111 Aluminum Windows H. Sealant: for sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer s standard, permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement that complies with performance requirements. I. Glazing: Clear, insulating glass units complying with Section J. Glazing System: Manufacturer s standard factory glazing system that produces watertight seal and complies with performance requirements. K. Hardware: Provide manufacturer s standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907 and performance requirements. Other corrosion resistant compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions that comply with performance requirements is also acceptable. Cadmium plated hardware is not permitted. Do not use aluminum frictional contact with other metals. L. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902 and performance requirements. 1. Sash Balance: Concealed ultra lift spring type capable of lifting 70 percent of sash weight of size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. M. Sill Cap / Track: Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish track of thickness, dimensions, and profile designed to comply with the performance requirements and drain to the exterior. N. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. O. Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design. P. Single Hung Windows (Contractor s option to provide double hung): Provide the following operating hardware: 1. Sash Balances: Two per operating sash. 2. Handles: Applied sash lift bar or pull down on bottom rail of forward placed operating sash, two per sash. 3. Handle: Continuous, integral sash lift bar or pull down on bottom rail of forward placed operating sash. 4. Sash Lock: Spring loaded plunger lock with keeper on meeting rail of lower sash; two per sash. Q. Insect Screens: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each operable sash. 1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004 Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows, Residential R-20 class and minimum standards of appearance, fabrication, attachment of screen fabric, hardware, and accessories and this Sections performance requirements, whichever are stricter. 2. Finish and Color of Frame shall match white color of window unless otherwise indicated. 3. Glass Fiber Mesh Fabric: Mesh of PVC coated, glass fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration in the a charcoal gray color. Comply with ASTM D 3656 and performance requirements. 2.2 Fabrication A. General: Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes to fit existing openings that comply with AAMA / NWWDA 101 / I.S.2 conforming to performance requirements. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash. C. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed, lowconductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal to metal contact. 1. Provide thermal break construction that has been in use for not less than three years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention. 2. Provide thermal barriers tested in according to AAMA 505 which comply with performance requirements.

112 Aluminum Windows Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging thermal breaks at frame. D. Weather Stripping: Provide full perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash. E. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. F. Factory Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory. G. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush and hairline. H. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. 2.3 Finishes A. General: Comply with NAAMM s Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with treated wood, cementitious, or dissimilar materials. D. High Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: manufacturer s standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA a. Color: White, unless otherwise indicated. b. Sheen: Gloss Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify wall openings and adjoining materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 1. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions; levelness of sill plate; coordination with wall flashings, vapor retarders, and other built-in components; operation clearances; and other conditions affecting performance of Work. a. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. b. Wood Frame Walls: Dry clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. c. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil;, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. B. Do not apply / install products to unsatisfactory substrates. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation A. General: comp0ly with manufacturer s written instructions and performance requirements for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets for weathertight construction. D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. E. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in Dissimilar materials paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA / NWWDA 101 / I.S Adjusting

113 Aluminum Windows A. Adjust operating sashes, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.4 Cleaning A. Remove labels and visible markings. B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. C. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and rinse and wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.5 Protection A. Do not permit continuing construction activities near unprotected finish surfaces. B. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer s written recommendations. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION

114 Door Hardware SECTION DOOR HARDWARE Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Door hardware and related items necessary for complete installation and operation of doors. 1.2 References A. Uniform Federal Accessible Standards (UFAS). B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA). C. ANSI / BHMA A Butts and Hinges 2..2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches Cylinders and input Devices for Locks Architectural Door Trim Cabinet Locks Interconnected Locks and Latches Mortise locks and latches Series Sliding and Folding Door Hardware Auxiliary Hardware Materials and Finishes Thresholds Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems. D. ANSI / BHMA A250.8 Standard Steel doors and Frames. 1.3 Submittals A. Obtain Owner approval for appearance of door hardware to be utilized. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Hardware for application on metal and wood doors and frames shall be made to standard templates. Furnish templates to the fabricator of these items in sufficient time so as not to delay construction. B. The following items shall be of the same manufacturer, except as otherwise specified: 1. Mortise locksets. 2. Hinges for hollow metal and wood doors. Part 2 Products 2.1 Hardware A. Butt Hinges: Provide three knuckle butt hinges, three per door conforming to ANSI A Exterior Doors: Type A2112 / A5112. Hinges for exterior outswinging doors shall have nonremovable pins. 2. Interior Doors: Type A8112 / A5112. Hinges for doors exposed to high humidity (bathrooms, and kitchens) shall be of stainless steel material. B. Door Stops: Provide spring type door stops, baseboard installation, conforming to ANSI A C. Locks and Latches: Mortise installation conforming to ANSI / GHMA Exterior doors: Provide Kwikset Ultramax Signature Security Series Entry Lever, and matching deadbolt (single cylinder) with satin nickel finish, or approved equal. 2. Interior doors: Provide Kwikset Ultramax signature Series lever with satin nickel finish, or approved equal. Privacy locking to be provided on bathroom and bedroom doors. All other doors shall be passage only. No keyed access is allowed except on exterior doors. D. Door Viewer: 360 degree door scope viewer. Mounted at Owner requested height. Finish to match door hardware. E. Thresholds: Conform to ANSI A156.21, mill finish extruded aluminum, unless otherwise specified. Thresholds shall be installed in a bed of sealant with stainless steel machine screws and expansion shields.

115 Door Hardware Thresholds at exterior doors provide non-slip abrasive finish. 2. Provide mitered returns where threshold extends more than ½ inch beyond face of frame. F. Weather Stripping: Conform to ANSI A Install weather stripping continuous on three sides of door frame. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Hardware Heights A. Locate hardware on existing doors at heights to match existing hardware. B. For new doors locate hardware at heights above finished floor indicated below, unless Owner request alternative height. Alternative height installations must be coordinated with HCD personnel in writing prior to installation. 1. Locksets and latch sets centerline of strike at 40 5/16 inches. 2. Deadbolts centerline of strike at 48 inches. 3. Locate other hardware at standard residential heights. 3.2 Installation A. Install all hardware according to manufacturer s written directions and in compliance with local and State of Florida Building Codes. B. When installing new hardware on existing doors utilize existing hardware locations. C. When installing new hardware on new doors install according to manufacturer s written directions. 3.3 Cleaning and Protection A. Clean all hardware after installation. B. Protect hardware from damage during construction operations. END OF SECTION

116 Glazing SECTION GLAZING Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Glass B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.2 References A. 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. B. ANSI Z97.1 American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and methods of Test. C. ASTM C864 Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. D. ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. E. ASTM C1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass. F. ASTM C1048 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass. G. ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. H. Glass Association of North America (GANA) GANA Glazing Manual (GM). I. GANA Sealant Manual (SM). J. Insulating Glass Manufacturer Alliance (IGMA) TM-3000 North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use. 1.3 Performance Requirements A. Glazing Unit Design: All glazing for windows and installations must meet local and State of Florida Building Code requirements and be compliant with Miami-Dade County guidelines. B. Design glazing system consistent with guidance and practices presented in the GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual, as applicable to the Project. Installed glazing is to withstand applied loads, thermal stresses, thermal movements, building movements, permitted tolerances, and combinations of these conditions without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; unsafe engagement of the framing system; deflections beyond specific limits; or other defects in construction. 1.4 Submittals A. Product Data: Glass types and glazing compounds. Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Part 2 Products 2.1 Glass Materials A. Insulated Glass Units: Provide factory fabricated, hermetically sealed glass unit consisting of two panes of glass separated by a dehydrated air space and comply with ASTM E Provide minimum thickness required to meet performance requirements. 2. Clear float glass complying with ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select), except where safety glass is required by building codes. 3. Safety glass shall be clear, bully tempered with horizontal tempering and compliant with ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select) and ASTM C1048. B. Replacement glass in existing windows shall utilize same standards as insulated glass units. 2.2 Glazing Compounds A. Use window manufacturer s standard glazing compounds and installation methods that must be compliant with local and State of Florida Building Code and meet the Miami-Dade County requirements. B. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tub spacing device; Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. C. For reglazing of broken window panes use glazing compounds to match existing window glazing installation.

117 Glazing Glazing Accessories A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch by width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane / unit weight and area. B. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device, 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper, black color. C. For glazing replacement in existing window use new glazing accessories to match existing window glazing installation. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement; weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. C. Review for conditions which may adversely affect glass and glazing unit installation, prior to commencement of installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Preparation A. For sealant glazing, prepare glazing surfaces in accordance with GANA Sealant Manual. B. When replacing glazing in existing window, shop fabricate and cut glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by openings to provide GANA recommended edge clearances. C. Verify that components used are compatible. D. Clean and dry glazing surfaces. 3.3 Installation A. Glazing in new window units shall be installed at the factory and compliant with local and State of Florida Building Codes and Miami-Dade County requirements. B. For replacement of broken glazing existing windows, installation method and materials shall match existing glazing installation for the window. 3.4 Cleaning A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.5 Protection A. Protect finished surfaces from damage during erection and after completion of work. Strippable plastic coatings on colored anodized finish are not acceptable. END OF SECTION

118 Gypsum Plaster SECTION GYPSUM PLASTER Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Gypsum plaster over metal lath, concrete, masonry, and other solid surfaces. B. Existing plaster repairs. 1.2 References A. ASTM C11 Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems. B. ASTM C28 / C28M Standard Specification for Gypsum Plasters. C. ASTM C35 Standard Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster. D. ASTM C61 / C61M Standard Specification for Gypsum Keene s Cement. E. ASTM C206 Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime. F. ASTM C842 Standard Specification for Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster. G. ASTM A641 / A641M Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. H. ASTM A653 / A653M Steel sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. I. ASTM C631 Bonding Compounds for Interior Gypsum Plastering. J. ASTM C841 Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring. K. ASTM C847 Metal Lath. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials, characteristics, and limitations of products specified. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C842. B. Installer Qualifications: company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum of five years of experience. 1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Protection A. Deliver manufactured materials in the manufacturer s original unbroken packages or containers which are labeled plainly with the manufacturer s names and brands. Keep cementitious materials dry and stored off the ground, under cover and away from seating walls and other damp surfaces until ready for use. 1.6 Project Conditions A. Comply with ASTM C842 requirements. 1.7 Mock Up A. Construct Mock Up of each type of installation and repair, illustrating surface finish for approval. B. Mock Up may remain as part of the Work. 1.8 Environmental Requirements A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is under 50 degrees F or over 80 degrees F. B. Maintain ambient temperature range for one week prior to installation, during installation, and one week after plaster has set or until plaster has dried. 1.9 Performance Requirements A. Where plaster repairs occur, provide gypsum plaster assembly identical to existing adjacent plaster work. Part 2 Products 2.1 Manufacturers A. Gypsum Plaster 1. National Gypsum Company 2. USG Company 3. Approved Equal 2.2 Plaster Materials A. Gypsum Neat Plaster: ASTM C 28; fibered.

119 Gypsum Plaster B. Ready-Mixed Gypsum Plaster: ASTM C28; mill mixed type, requiring on the addition of water. C. Gypsum Keene s Cement: ASTM C61 / C61M. D. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S; special finishing hydrated lime. E. Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C35; sand and lightweight aggregates. 1. Lightweight Aggregate: Vermiculite. F. Ready-Mixed Finishing Plaster: Gypsum / Lime putty type, ASTM C28; mixture of gauging plaster and lime. G. Ready-Mixed Finishing Plaster: Sand float type; ASTM C28 and C35; prepared mixture of gypsum plaster and sand. H. Aggregate for Finish Coats: As specified in ASTM C842. I. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that could adversely affect plaster. J. Plaster Bonder: 1. Acceptable product: Larsen Products Co., Durabond Type: Acrylic acetate. 2.3 Metal Lath and Furring A. Metal Lath and Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer for repair applications. B. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C847, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet with ASTM A653 / A653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 1. Paper Backing: Kraft paper factory bonded to back of lath. 2. Diamond Mesh Lath: 3. Flat-Rib lath: a. Rib depth of not more than 1/8 inch; 2.75 lb / square yard. b. Rib depth of 3/8 inch: 3.4 lb / square yard. C. Gypsum Lath: 1. Type: Sheet. 2. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 2.4 Accessories A. General: Coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required as per ASTM C841. B. Cornerite: Fabricated from expanded metal lath with ASTM A653 / A653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. C. Striplath: Fabricated from expanded metal lath with ASTM A653 / A653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. D. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc coated (galvanized) steel. 1. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. 2. Smallnose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners. 3. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners. 4. Bullnose cornerbead, radius ¾ inch minimum, with expanded flanges, use as required for best installation. E. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc coated (galvanized) steel; square edged style; with expanded flanges. F. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 2.5 Fasteners A. Tie wire, screws, staples, clips, nails, and other fasteners ASTM C841. B. Provide fasteners for securing metal plastering bases having heads, or inserted through washers large enough to engage two strands (1 on each side of the washer) of the metal plastering base. C. Screws: ASTM C Plaster Mixes

120 Gypsum Plaster A. Over Solid Bases: Two coat application, ready mixed plaster, mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM C842 and manufacturer s instructions, to match existing adjacent plaster. B. Over Metal Lath: Three coat application, ready mixed plaster, mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM C842 and manufacturer s instructions, to match existing adjacent plaster. C. Ready Mixed Plaster Materials: Mix in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. D. Finish Coat for Floated Finish: Lime putty with gypsum gauging plaster, mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM C842. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that existing conditions are satisfactory before starting work. B. Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb is filled flush, and surface is ready to receive Work of this Section. Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form release agents exist on surface that are detrimental to plaster or plaster bond. C. Grounds and Blocking: Verify items within walls for other sections of Work have been installed. D. Metal Lath and Accessories: Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface perimeter accessories are in place. 3.2 Preparation A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with ASTM C842. B. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction. C. Clean surfaces of foreign matter. Thoroughly dampen surfaces before using acid solutions, solvent, or detergents to perform cleaning. Wash surface with clean water. D. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and smooth faced masonry. E. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. 3.3 Installation A. Lath 1. Apply lath in accordance with ASTM C841, to match existing plaster installation. a. Type: To conform to Table 2 of ASTM C841. b. Fasteners: Based on type of expanded metal lath type to conform to Table 1 of ASTM C841. c. Where metal plastering bases are required over solid backing, provide self-furring, diamondmesh lath type. d. Attach self-furring diamond-mesh lath directly to masonry and concrete with hardened nails, power actuated drive pins. Locate fasteners at the dimples or crimps only. e. Do not install continuous plastering bases through expansion and control joints. Terminate plastering base at each side of joint. 2. Gypsum lath may be used in lieu of expanded metal lath for gypsum plaster only on straight flat surfaces of walls, except for lathing in wet areas. B. Plaster 1. Apply gypsum plaster in accordance with ASTM C842 and manufacturer s instructions. 2. Thickness: To match existing surrounding surfaces, including quantity of layers. a. Base Coat Application: 1. Install scratch coat with sufficient material and to embed substrate. After scratch coat is firm, scratch in one direction only, to provide mechanical bond for brown coat. 2. Apply brown coat with sufficient material and pressure to ensure tight contact with scratch coat. Bring surface to true, even plane by rodding, and float to a uniformly rough surface. Fill defects and scratches with plaster material, prior to application of finish coat. 3. Finish coat (skim coat) over repairs and surrounding surfaces to adjacent wall or ceiling juncture. a. Apply base coat with firm pressure and immediately double back to provide a minimum of 1/16 inch thickness. After base has taken up, lightly trowel to limit trowel marks and imperfections; do not over trowel. Cross rake with a fine wire rake. b. After base coat has set apply finish coat with firm pressure and immediately double back to provide uniform thickness not to exceed 1/16 inch, or 3/32 inch total plaster veneer thickness.

121 Gypsum Plaster c. Trowel finish coat after surface has become firm, to provide smooth troweled finish. Use water sparingly; do not over trowel. 4. Finish Texture: Float to a consistent smooth finish or texture to match existing adjacent finish. 5. Perform work in panels to nearest natural break or between accessories. 6. Cut 1/16 inch deep V-joint in finish coat of plaster adjacent to metal door frames and wherever plaster finishes flush with other materials, except where casing beads are installed. Omit 1/16 inch deep V-joint on walls and partitions where plaster is recessed back from face of door frames, or similar conditions. C. Plastering Accessories 1. Install accessories in accordance with ASTM C841 and as required for a complete Project. D. Patching 1. Large holes are defined as those having both width and length greater than trowel length. a. Coat edges of existing old plaster and other areas as recommended by manufacturer with plaster bonder. b. Plaster large holes with scratch and brown coats, as necessary to match existing adjacent plaster. c. Skim coat with gauging plaster flush, over repair and surrounding surfaces to adjacent wall or ceiling juncture. 2. Small holes are defined as those having one dimension, either length or width, trowel length, or less, in size. a. Apply a plaster bonder to edges of existing old plaster. b. Trowel plaster into holes and leave rough. c. Skim coat with gauging plaster flush, over repair and surrounding surfaces to adjacent wall or ceiling juncture. 3. Wide cracks, deep cracks, and cracks with uneven adjoining surfaces shall be raked out to a minimum ¼ wide down to bare substrate. a. Brush crack clean. b. Apply plaster bonder. c. Trowel plaster into opening to match surrounding surfaces. d. Skim coat with gauging plaster flush, over repair to surrounding surfaces to adjacent wall or ceiling juncture. 4. Tape corner cracks after adjacent surfaces have been repaired. 5. After all work, except painting is finished, point around trim, frames, and similar. New work shall be flush and in plane with existing plaster. 6. Patch damaged plaster to match previously applied plaster in color and texture. 7. Sanding plaster is prohibited. 3.4 Cleaning and Protection A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after plastering is complete. B. Remove droppings or spatterings from other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. C. Leave clean and in a condition to receive paint or other finish. END OF SECTION

122 Portland Cement Plaster SECTION PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Portland cement based plaster (stucco). B. Existing plaster repairs. 1.2 References A. ASTM C11 Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems. B. ASTM C91 / C91M Masonry Cement. C. ASTM C150 C150M Portland Cement. D. ASTM C206 Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime. E. ASTM C207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. F. ASTM C847 Metal lath G. ASTM C897 Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement Based Plasters. H. ASTM C926 Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster. I. ASTM C932 Surface Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior Plastering. J. ASTM C933 Welded Wire Lath. K. ASTM A653 / A653M Steel sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials, characteristics, and limitations of products specified. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C926. B. Installer Qualifications: company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum of five years of experience. 1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Protection A. Deliver manufactured materials in the manufacturer s original unbroken packages or containers which are labeled plainly with the manufacturer s names and brands. Keep cementitious materials dry and stored off the ground, under cover and away from seating walls and other damp surfaces until ready for use. 1.6 Project Conditions A. Comply with ASTM C926 requirements. 1.7 Mock Up A. Construct Mock Up of each type of installation and repair, illustrating surface finish for approval. B. Mock Up may remain as part of the Work. 1.8 Environmental Requirements A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is under 40 degrees F or when drop in temperature below 40 degrees F is expected within 24 hours after application. B. Maintain minimum temperature for a period of not less than 24 hours after application. 1.9 Performance Requirements A. Where plaster repairs occur, provide gypsum plaster assembly identical to existing adjacent plaster work. Part 2 Products 2.1 Portland Cement Plaster Materials A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 / C150M, Type I. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91 / C91M, Type N. C. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S; or ASTM C207, Type S. D. Aggregates (Sand): ASTM C897, graded as required to suit texture to match existing finish. E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C932. F. Factory Prepared Finish Coat for Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco): Factory prepared dry blend of materials, integrally colored, designed for exterior finish coat application.

123 Portland Cement Plaster Pigments: ASTM C979 / C979M, lime proof mineral oxide. 2. Particle Size: Not more than 35 percent, by weight of all ingredients, including cement, aggregate, hydrated lime, admixture and coloring pigment is to pass a number 100 sieve. G. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that could adversely affect plaster. 2.2 Metal Lath and Furring A. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized except as modified by ASTM C1063. Self-furring where applied over solid backing. 1. Flat diamond mesh weighting not less than ¾ pounds per square yard. B. Stucco Mesh: Flat expanded diamond mesh pattern, with openings approximately 1 ½ inches by 3 inches, weighting not less than 3.6 pounds per square yard, backing as specified. C. Wire Lath: 1. Zinc coated (galvanized). 2. Welded Wire Lath: ASTM 933, with backing as specified. 3. Self-furring when applied over solid backing. D. Building Paper Backing for Metal Plastering Bases: 1. Backing attached to lath as specified in ASTM C Accessories A. Provide accessories that are roll formed galvanized steel, except that cornerite and strip lath that are formed from steel sheets with manufacturer s standard galvanized coating. B. Provide welded wire corner reinforcements of galvanized 17 gauge steel wire conforming to ASTM A1064 / A1064M. C. Provide furring, including hangers, bolts, inserts, clips, fastenings, and attachments of number, size, and design to develop the full strength of the members. D. Control Joints: ASTM C1063, zinc coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanged and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. E. Cornerite: Fabricated from expanded metal lath with ASTM A653 / A653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. F. External (outside) Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A653 / A653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. G. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc coated (galvanized) steel. 1. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. 2. Smallnose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners. 3. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners. 4. Bullnose cornerbead, radius ¾ inch minimum, with expanded flanges, use as required for best installation. H. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc coated (galvanized) steel; square edged style; with expanded flanges. 2.4 Fasteners A. Tie wire, screws, staples, clips, nails, and other fasteners ASTM C1063. B. Provide fasteners for securing metal plastering bases having heads, or inserted through washers large enough to engage two strands (1 on each side of the washer) of the metal plastering base. C. Screws: ASTM C1002. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that existing conditions are satisfactory before starting work. B. Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb is filled flush, and surface is ready to receive Work of this Section. Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form release agents exist on surface that are detrimental to plaster or plaster bond. C. Grounds and Blocking: Verify items within walls for other sections of Work have been installed.

124 Portland Cement Plaster D. Metal Lath and Accessories: Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface perimeter accessories are in place. 3.2 Preparation A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with ASTM C926. B. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction. C. Clean surfaces of foreign matter. Thoroughly dampen surfaces before using acid solutions, solvent, or detergents to perform cleaning. Wash surface with clean water. D. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and smooth faced masonry. E. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. 3.3 Installation A. Lath: Where Portland cement plaster is installed over non-solid bases only. 1. Apply lath in accordance with ASTM C1063, to match existing plaster installation. a. Type: Where plaster is required on solid concrete or masonry bases, metal plastering bases are not required. Where required use stucco mesh. 1. On ceiling or soffit framing use flat diamond mesh lath. 2. Over steel columns, provide expanded lath. 3. Where metal plastering bases are used as a base for exterior Portland cement plaster over wall sheathing, provide wire stucco mesh with water resistant backing. 2. Form true surfaces, straight or in curves as required to match adjacent surfaces, without sags or buckles and with long dimension of lath at right angles to direction of supports. 3. Do not install continuous metal plastering bases through expansion and control joints. Terminate at each side of joint 4. Attach latch directly to masonry and concrete with hardened nails, power actuated drive pins or other approved fasteners. Install fast4eners at dimples or crimps only. 5. Wood plugs are not acceptable.. B. Plaster 1. Surfaces that are to receive Portland cement plaster are to be prepared and conditioned in accordance with ASTM C New surfaces of masonry and concrete: a. Remove projections and clean surface of oil. b. Fill depressions, holes, cracks and similar voids flush with Portland cement plaster to provide substrate within the tolerance specified in ASTM C926. c. Use bonding agent. d. Cover with self-furring lath where required to keep the total plaster thickness as specified in Table 4 of ASTM C926 and match existing adjacent stucco surfaces. 3. Existing surfaces of concrete and masonry: a. Clean surface of dirt and other foreign matter which will prevent bond. b. Apply dash bond coat or bonding agent. c. Where existing surfaces have a coating such as paint or bituminous waterproofing apply metal plastering base as indicated. 4. Thickness: To match existing surrounding surfaces, including quantity of layers. a. Three coat work is to be used over all metal plastering bases, with or without solid backing. b. Two coat work may only be used over solid bases. c. Proportion, mix and apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C Finish Texture: Float to a consistent smooth finish or texture to match existing adjacent finish. 6. Perform work in panels to nearest natural break or between accessories. 7. Cut 1/16 inch deep V-joint in finish coat of plaster adjacent to metal door frames and wherever plaster finishes flush with other materials, except where casing beads are installed. Omit 1/16 inch deep V-joint on walls and partitions where plaster is recessed back from face of door frames, or similar conditions. C. Plastering Accessories 1. Install accessories in accordance with ASTM C1063 and as required for a complete Project.

125 Portland Cement Plaster Cleaning and Protection A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after stucco is complete. B. Remove droppings or spatterings from other surfaces not indicated to have a stucco finish. C. Leave clean and in a condition to receive paint or other finish. END OF SECTION

126 Gypsum Board Assemblies SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Installation and finishing of gypsum board. B. Interior metal stud framing. C. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.2 References A. ANSI A136.1 American national Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. B. ASTM C442 / C442M Standard Specification for Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board. C. ASTM C475 Standard Specification for Joint Compound and joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. D. ASTM C645 Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. E. ASTM C754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Panel Products. F. ASTM C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. G. ASTM C1002 Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. H. ASTM C1396 / C1396M standard Specification for Gypsum Board. I. Gypsum Association (GA) GA 216, Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 1.3 Submittals A. New Partitions 1. Provide manufacturer s data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. 2. Provide manufacturer s product data for systems required. Include installation instructions and data sufficient to show compliance with requirements. 3. Submit data substantiating bracing requirements. 4. Submittal of manufacturer s standard published load tables, marked to show products selected to comply with design requirements and project conditions will be acceptable. Where manufacturer s standard published load tables are not adequate to demonstrate compliance with design requirements and project conditions, submit design data bearing the seal of a professional engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida. B. Gypsum Board: Submit certification that gypsum board types, gypsum backing board, cementitious backer units, and joint treating materials do not contain asbestos material. 1.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling: In accordance with the requirements of ASTM C840. A. Deliver materials in original and unopened packages, containers, or bundles, with brand names and manufacturer s labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in dry location, fully protected from weather and direct exposure to sunlight. C. Stack gypsum board products flat and level, properly supported to prevent sagging or damage to ends and edges. D. Store corner bead and other metal and plastic accessories to prevent bending, sagging, distortion, or other mechanical damage. 1.5 Project Conditions A. Environmental Conditions: In accordance with the requirements of ASTM C840. B. Do not store or install products until building is fully enclosed and temperature and humidity controlled. C. Ventilation: Provide controlled ventilation and dehumidification. D. Do not allow excessive variations in humidity or temperature. Part 2 Products 2.1 Framing Materials A. Wood Framing: To match existing property construction and specified in Section

127 Gypsum Board Assemblies B. Metal Framing Materials: 1. Non-loadbearing framing system components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A446 or ASTM A792, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754, for the spacing to match existing construction. a. Studs: C shaped with knurled faces. b. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. c. Ceiling channels: C shaped, cold rolled. d. Furring: Hat shaped, minimum depth of 7/8 inch, unless indicated otherwise. e. Thickness: As required for span and loading, but not less than the following: gage, unless otherwise indicated. So-called EQ or equivalent gage is not acceptable. f. Stud spacing: 16 inches, maximum. g. Maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 2. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. 3. Partition Head to Structure connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection for friction fit of studs cut short and screwed to secondary deflection channel set inside but unattached to top rack. 2.2 Gypsum Board Materials A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396, Type X; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut 1. Thickness: To match existing surrounding gypsum wallboard thickness, except on new partitions which shall be 5/8 inch thickness. 2. Edges: Tapered; beveled or rounded. B. Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board and Moisture and Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396, Type X, and ASTM C630; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Utilize water resistant gypsum backing board where tile is to be installed. 2. Utilize moisture and mold resistant gypsum board in all kitchens, bathrooms, and laundry rooms. 3. Thickness: To match existing surrounding gypsum wallboard thickness, except on new partitions which shall be 5/8 inch thickness. 4. Long Edges: Tapered. 5. Facing: Green Paper Face. 2.3 Accessories A. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide trim and accessories by manufacturer of gypsum board materials, made of galvanized steel or zinc alloy and configured for concealment in joint compound. 1. Include corner beads, edge trim, and other trim units necessary for project conditions. Provide accessories as required in order to achieve a complete project. 2. Exposed trim: Provide manufacturer s standard metal units designed to be left exposed or semiexposed. B. Corner Beads: Galvanized Steel. C. Edge Trim: Bead Type: D. Control Joints: Provide manufacturer s standard one-piece control joints of zinc alloy. E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Joint Compound: a. General interior use: Ready mixed vinyl based joint compound. All purpose taping and topping compound: Type specifically formulated for embedding tape and accessories, for prefilling, and for finishing drywall. b. Water resistant gypsum board intended for tile surfacing: Provide setting type compound specifically recommended by manufacturer of water resistant gypsum board. 2. Joint Tape: a. Gypsum wallboard: Provide manufacturer s standard paper type tape. b. Water resistant gypsum board: Provide open-weave fiberglass type.

128 Gypsum Board Assemblies F. Screws: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type, lengths as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. G. Furring, Fasteners, and Connectors: Manufacturer s recommended system for specific application indicated, complying with ASTM C754, ASTM C1047, and ASTM C840. H. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641, soft, Class1, galvanized. 1. Ceiling hangers: Minimum 8 gage wire. 2. Furring channel ties: Minimum 18 gage wire. I. Sealant: At water resistant gypsum board, provide ANSI A136.1, Type I organic adhesive. J. Blocking: Provide metal blocking for mounting of wall cabinets, shelves, toilet accessories, etc. 1. Provide 6 inch, 16 gage, steel runner notched to bypass steel studs and secured with two 3/8 inch pan head screws. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that project conditions and substrates are appropriate for Work of this Section to commence. 3.2 Framing Installation A. Comply with ASTM C754 and manufacturer s instructions. B. Studs: 1. Extend partitions to structure, to match existing construction. 2. Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging. C. Partition Heights: 1. Extend partitions from floor to underside of structure above unless indicated otherwise. 2. Blocking and bracing: Install blocking and bracing as recommended by manufacturer for adequate support of wall mounted items installed as work of other Sections. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double 20 gage, side by side studs at jambs on both sides of opening. E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete and masonry walls indicated to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 1. Orientation on solid walls: Vertical. 2. Spacing: At 16 inches on center. F. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, shelving, and other fixtures mounted to partitions. Screw steel blocking channels to studs. 1. For wood stud blocking use wood blocking as specified in Section Gypsum Board Installation A. Comply with ASTM C840 and manufacturer s instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Coordinate installation of gypsum board with other trades and related work. C. Apply ceiling board prior to installation of wallboards. Arrange to minimize butt joints near center of ceiling area. D. Install wall boards in a manner which will minimize butt end joints in center of wall area. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of walls. E. Butt all joints loosely, with maximum of 1/16 inch between boards. F. Place wrapped edges adjacent to one another; do not place cut edges or butt ends adjacent to wrapped edges. G. Support all edges and ends of each board on framing or by solid substrate. H. Single Layer Installation: Install gypsum board vertically, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. On walls and partitions, plan installation so that the leading edge or end of gypsum board is attached to open end of stud flange first.

129 Gypsum Board Assemblies All ceiling installation, gypsum board must be screw attached with solid anchorage into framing members to meet all code and manufacturer recommendations. I. Double Layer Installation: Use gypsum backing board or gypsum wallboard for first layer, placed perpendicular to framing or furring members. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. 1. In ceiling work install base layer with long edges perpendicular to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. All ceiling gypsum board installation must be screw attached with solid anchorage into framing members to meet code and manufacturer recommendations. 2. In wall work, install base layer with long edges parallel to framing members with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. J. Moisture and Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: Use moisture and mold resistant gypsum board in all kitchens, bathrooms, and laundry rooms. 1. Install moisture and mold resistant gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations for installation and complying with ASTM C1658. K. Water Resistant Board: Install water resistant backing board on partitions to receive tile. 1. Install water resistant gypsum backing board in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations for installation, including minimum clearances and sealing of penetrations and edges. 2. Do not install water resistant backing board on ceilings or over vapor retarders. 3.4 Installation of Trim and Accessories A. Comply with manufacturer s recommendations for installation of trim items. Except for items intended by manufacturer, approved by the Owner and HCD personnel, to be left exposed or semi-exposed, install trim units for concealment in joint finishing compound. Wherever possible, fasten metal trim items to substrate with same fasteners used to install gypsum board products. B. Set accessories plumb, level and true to line, neatly mitered at corners and intersections, and securely attached to supporting surfaces. C. Install in one piece, without the limits of the longest commercially available lengths. D. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as follows: 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. 2. Install one-piece control joints at required locations. Do not remove tape until finishing operations are complete. E. Corner Beads: Install at external corners. Use longest practical lengths. Use screws only. Do not use crimping tool. F. Isolation Joints: Where gypsum board construction abuts cabinetry, windows, structural components, and other dissimilar materials provide isolation by stopping board a minimum of ¼ inch from structure, for finishing by means of exposed or semi-exposed trim. 3.5 Finishing A. Finish joints, edges, corners, and fastener heads in accordance with ASTM C840. Use Level 4 finish for all finished areas. B. Before proceeding with installation of finishing materials, assure the following: 1. Gypsum board is fastened and held close to framing and furring. 2. Fastening heads in gypsum board are slightly below surface in dimple formed by driving tool. C. Do not mix joint compounds except as specifically recommended by manufacturer. D. Finish joints, fasteners, and all openings, including openings around penetrations. E. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board. F. Penetrations in Wallboard: Fill cutouts and openings around fixtures and penetrations with joint compound. G. Penetrations in Gypsum Backing Board: Seal cut edges with elastomeric sealant. 3.6 Repairs A. After taping and finishing has been completed, and before painting, repair all damaged and defective Work.

130 Gypsum Board Assemblies B. Patch holes or openings ½ inch or less in diameter with a setting type finishing compound or patching plaster. C. Repair holes or openings over ½ inch diameter with 5/8 inch thick gypsum board secured in such a manner as to provide solid substrate equivalent to undamaged surface. D. Tape and refinish scratched, abraded or damaged finish surfaces including cracks and joints. 3.7 Cleaning A. Promptly remove any residual gypsum drywall materials from adjacent or adjoining surfaces, leaving spaces ready for subsequent finish operations. 3.8 Finish Level A. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view; from 8 inches above suspended ceilings to top of partition. 1. Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. 2. Provide surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable. B. Level 2: Under tile finishes; utility areas and areas behind cabinetry. 1. Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. 2. Provide one separate coat of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. 3. Provide surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable. C. Level 3: Surfaces to have a medium (orange peel) or heavy hand and /or spray applied texture. 1. Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. 2. Provide one separate coat of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. 3. Provide smooth surfaces, free of tool marks and ridges. 4. Coat with drywall primer prior to application of final finishes D. Level 4: Surfaces to receive little to no texture (smooth). 1. Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. 2. Provide three separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. 3. Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges. 4. Coat with drywall primer prior to application of tile finishes. END OF SECTION

131 Tile SECTION TILE Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Stone thresholds. D. Stone window sills. E. Ceramic trim. F. Ceramic accessories. 1.2 References A. ANSI A108 Series and ANSI A118 Series Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. B. ANSI A137.1 Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. C. Tile Council of North America, Inc (TCA) TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. D. Code of Federal Regulation (CFR) 40 CFR 59, Determination of Volatile Matter Content, Water Content, Density Volume Solids, and Wight Solids of Surface Coating. E. Marble Institute of America (MIA) MIA Design manual. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer s data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. B. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. C. Maintenance materials: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish of tile installed. D. Samples: Contractor must provide samples of tile for final Owner approval prior to purchase. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in the Section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. C. Each type and color of tile to be provided from a single source. D. Each type and color of mortar, adhesive, and grout to be provided from the same source. 1.5 Mock Up A. Construct a one wall mock up, incorporating all components specified for the location. B. Approved mock up may remain as part of the Work. 1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. B. Deliver materials in original containers with labels legible and intact and grade seals unbroken. C. Store materials to prevent damage or contamination. 1.7 Field Conditions A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. Part 2 Products 2.1 Tile A. Comply with ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade, except as modified: 1. Abrasion Resistance Classification: a. Tested in accordance with values listed in Table 1, ASTM C1027. b. Class V, 12,000 revolutions for floors in Hallways and Kitchens. c. Class IV, 6,000 revolutions for remaining areas. B. Slip Resistant for Floor Tile 1. Coefficient of friction when tested in accordance with ANSI A137.1 and measured per the TCA manual:

132 Tile a. Equal to or greater than.42 for level interior tile floors that will be walked on when wet. 2. Tile having abrasive grains: a. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Abrasive grains throughout body of the tile. b. Quarry Tile: Abrasive grains uniformly embedded in face at rate of approximately 7.5 percent of surface area. c. Porcelain paver tile: Matte surface finish with raised ridges spaced uniformly over tile surface. 1. Nominal 5/16 thick, with cushion edges. Porcelain tile produced by the dust pressed method are to be made of approximately 50% feldspar; the remaining 50% is to be made up of various high quality light firing ball clays yielding a tile with a water absorption rate of 0.5% or less and a breaking strength of between 390 to 400 lbs. d. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 % e. Edges: Square f. Surface Finish: Unglazed g. Size, Shape, and Color: As indicated in the Scope of Work. Contractor to provide sample for Owner approval, prior to purchase. C. Glazed Wall Tile; ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Moisture Absorption: 3.0 to 7.0 % 2. Size, Shape, and Color: As indicated in the Scope of Work. Contractor to provide sample for Owner approval, prior to purchase. 3. Edges: Cushioned. 4. Surface Finish: High gloss. 2.2 Trim and Accessories a. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, surface bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications: Manufacturer same as tile. Use in the following locations: a. Open Edges: Bullnose. b. Inside Corners: Jointed c. Floor to Wall joints: Cove base. b. Thresholds: Marble, gray-white, honed finish on exposed faces; 2 inches wide by full width of wall or frame opening; ½ inch thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or seams. Soundness classification in accordance with MIA Design Manual III Groups. 1. Group A, minimum abrasive hardness of 10.0 per ASTM C1353 / C1353M or ASTM C241 / C241M. 2. Applications: Provide at the following locations: a. At doorways where tile terminates. b. At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height. c. Notch thresholds to match profile at door jambs. c. Window Sills (Interior): Marble, gray-white, honed finish on exposed faces; full width from window to edge of wall and/or trim plus ½ inch overhang; ½ inch thick; radiused corners ; without holes, cracks, or seams. Soundness classification in accordance with MIA Design manual III Groups. 1. Group A, minimum abrasive hardness of 10.0 per ASTM C1353 / C1353M or ASTM C241 / C241M. d. Ceramic Bath Accessories: White color inch ceramic towel bar holder, with plastic bar, integrally installed in tile field of tub / shower inch ceramic towel bar holder, with plastic bar, installed on wall adjacent to bathtub / shower. 3. Ceramic soap dish, integrally installed in tile field of tub / shower. 4. Ceramic toilet paper holder, with plastic spring loaded bar, installed within easy reach of toilet. 5. Ceramic toothbrush holder installed near vanity sink without impact to adjacent electrical outlets and/or switches. 2.3 Setting Materials A. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. B. Portland Cement mortar Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A.

133 Tile All components premeasured and prepackaged. 2. Dry latex additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate. 3. Liquid latex additive: Manufacturer s standard water emulsion. 4. Mix in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations. C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: One-component dry grout mix, field mixed with water; or two component, dry grout mix and liquid latex additive, field mixed; complying with ANSI A D. Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI For wall applications, provide non-sagging, latex Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI E. Organic Adhesives: ANSI A136.1, Type 1. F. Chemical Resistant Bond Coat: 1. Epoxy Resin Type: ANSI A Furan Resin Type: ANSI A G. Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane and Bond Coat: 1. TCA F for concrete slab on grade and TCA F112A-14 for above grade concrete. 2. Comply with ANSI A One component polyurethane: Liquid applied material having the following additional physical properties: a. Hardness; Shore A between b. Elongation: Between percent. c. Tensile Strength: Between pounds per square inch gauge. d. No volatile compounds. 4. Coal tar modified urethanes are not acceptable. H. Waterproofing Isolation Membrane: 1. Sheet System TCA F for concrete slab on grade and TCA F122A-14 for above grade concrete. 2. Composite sheet consisting of ASTM D5109, Type II, and Grade I Chlorinated Polyethylene sheet reinforced on both sides with a non-woven polyester fiber. 3. Designed for use in wet areas as isolation and positive waterproofing membranes for thin-set bonding of sheet to substrate and thin-set bonding of ceramic and porcelain tile or marble to sheet. Suited for both horizontal and vertical applications. 4. Conform to the following additional physical properties: a. Hardness: Shore A, per ASTM D2240 (10 second reading). b. Shrinkage: 5% maximum per ASTM D1204. c. Brittleness: No crack remains flexible at temperature -35 degrees F per ASTM D2497 (1/2 inch Mandrel Bend). d. Retention of Properties after Heat Aging: 80 % Tensile, Breaking and Elongation per ASTM D3045 (194 degrees F for 168 hours). 5. Manufacturer s standard sheet size with prefabricated or preformed inside and outside corners. 6. Sheet manufacturer s solvent welding liquid or xylene and edge sealant. 2.4 Grout Materials A. Standard Grout: Any type specified in ANSI A118.6 or A B. Color: As selected by Owner. 1. Pure mineral pigments, lime proof and non-fading, complying with ASTM C979 / C979M. 2. Coloring pigments may only be added to grout by the manufacturer. 3. Job colored grout is not acceptable. 4. Use is required in Commercial Portland cement Grout, Dry Set Grout, and Latex Portland Cement Grout. 2.5 Accessory Materials A. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9, high density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced, ½ inch thick, 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners.

134 Tile B. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to tile manufacturer and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion federation or Ceramic Tile Institute. 1. Do not use cleaning products which will prevent bond of subsequent tile setting materials including patching and leveling compounds and elastomeric waterproofing membrane and coat. 2. Materials containing acid or caustic material are not acceptable. C. Patching and Leveling Compound: 1. Portland cement base, polymer-modified, self leveling compound, manufactured specifically for resurfacing and leveling concrete floors. Products containing gypsum are not acceptable. 2. Provide a patching and leveling compound with the following minimum physical properties: a. Compressive strength: 3500 psi per ASTM C109 / C109M. b. Flexural strength: 1000 psi per ASTM C348 (28 day value). c. Tensile strength: 600 psi per ANSI d. Density: Capable of being applied in layers up to 1 ½ inches thick without fillers and up to 4 inches thick with fillers, being brought to a feather edge, and being trowelled to a smooth finish. 4. Primers, fillers, and reinforcement as required by manufacturer for application and substrate condition. 5. Ready for use in 48 hours after application. D. Water: Clean, potable and free from slats and other injurious elements to mortar and grout materials. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. 1. Variation in plane of subfloor, including concrete fills leveling compounds and mortar beds: a. Not more than ¼ inch in 10 feet from required elevation where Portland cement mortar setting bed is used. b. Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet where dry set Portland cement and latex Portland cement mortar setting beds and chemical resistant bond coats are used. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust free, and are ready to receive tile. 1. Variation in Plane of Wall Surfaces: a. Not more than ¼ inch in 8 feet from required plane where Portland cement mortar setting bed is used. b. Not more than 1/8 inch in 8 feet where dry set or latex Portland cement mortar or organic adhesive setting materials is used. C. Verify that subfloor surfaces are dust free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to subfloor surfaces. D. Verify that required floor mounted utilities are in correct locations. E. Verify that blocking has been installed wall in proper locations and penetrations through wall are in place prior to installation of tile. 3.2 Preparation A. Maintain ambient temperature of work areas at not less than 60 degrees F, without interruption, for not less than 24 hours before installation and not less than 3 days after installation. B. Maintain higher temperatures for a longer period of time where required by manufacturer s recommendation and ANSI Specifications for installation. C. Do not install tile when the temperature is above 100 degrees F. D. Do not install materials when the temperature of the substrate is below 60 degrees F. E. Do not allow temperature to fall below 50 degrees F after third day of completion of work. F. Protect surrounding work from damage. G. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

135 Tile H. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 1. Mix and apply patching and leveling compound in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. 2. Fill holes and cracks and align concrete floors that are out of required plane and patching and leveling compound. a. Thickness of compound as required to for proper installation. b. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. c. Apply patching and leveling compound to concrete and masonry wall surfaces that are out of required plane. d. Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane. I. Mortar Bed for Slopes to Drains: 1. Slope compound to drains not less than 1/8 inch per foot. 2. Screed for slope to drain and float finish. 3. Cure mortar bed for not less than 7 days. Do not use curing compounds or coatings. 4. Perform flood test to verify mortar and bed slopes to drain before installing tile. J. Additional preparation of concrete floors for tile set with epoxy, or furan resin is to be in accordance with manufacturer s printed instructions. K. Cleavage Membrane: 1. Install polyethene sheet as cleavage membrane in depressed slab situations. 2. Turn up at edge of depressed floor slab to top of floor. L. Properly prepare walls and floors to receive new tile installations. M. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI Q and board manufacturer s instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry set mortar to feather edge. 3.3 Installation A. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108, A118, and A136, manufacturer s instructions, and TCA Handbook installation guidelines. Comply with B. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. C. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. D. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. E. Install thresholds where indicated. F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. G. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. I. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install and cure grout in accordance with applicable standard as outlined in ANSI A108 and A118. J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. K. Lay out tile work so that no tile less than ½ full size is used. Make all cuts on the outer edge of the field. Align new tile work scheduled for existing spaces to the existing tile work unless otherwise specified. L. Set tile in firmly in place with finished surfaces in true planes. Align tile flush with adjacent tile. M. Cut and drill tile neatly without marring surface. N. Remove and reset tiles that are out of plane or misaligned. O. Floor Tile: 1. Extend floor tile beneath casework, appliances, and equipment. 2. Align finish surface of new tile work flush with other existing adjoining floor finish. 3. Push and vibrate tiles over 8 inches square to achieve full support of bond coat. P. Wall Tile: 1. Cover walls and partitions as indicated with tile.

136 Tile Finish wall surfaces behind and at sides of casework, appliances, and equipment with same tile as indicated. Q. Joints: 1. Keep all joints in line, straight, level, perpendicular and of even width unless indicated otherwise. 2. Make joints 1/16 inch wide for glazed wall tile and mosaic tile work. 3. Make joints in quarry tile work not less than ¼ inch nor more than 3/8 inch wide. Finish joints flush with surface of tile. 4. Jake joints in paver tile, porcelain type a maximum of 1/8 inch wide. 5. Movement Joints: a. Install expansion joints per TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. b. At expansion joints, rake out joint full depth of tile and setting bed and mortar bed. R. Back Buttering: 1. For tile installations in wet areas, including showers and tubs, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ASNSI A108, A118, and A136 series of tile installation standards. S. Porcelain Tile: Due to the denseness of porcelain tile use latex Portland cement bonding mortar that meets requirements of ANSI A Mix bonding mortars in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. 2. Provide liquid ratios and comply with dwell times during the placement of bonding mortar and tile. 3.4 Cleaning A. Clean tile and grout surfaces using materials and methods that comply with manufacturer s recommendations. B. Polish glazed surfaces with clean dry cloth. C. Methods and materials used are not permitted to damage or impair appearance of tile surfaces. D. The use of acid or acid cleaners on glazed tile surfaces is prohibited. 3.5 Protection of Finished work A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation or until grout and setting material is fully set and cured. B. Where traffic occurs over tile floor is unavoidable, cover tile floor with not less than 3/8 inch thick plywood or hardboard securely taped in place. Do not remove protective cover until time for final inspection. Clean tile of any tape, adhesive and stains. END OF SECTION

137 Resilient Flooring SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Resilient Flooring B. Resilient Sheet Flooring C. Resilient Base D. Accessories 1.2 References A. ASTM F1344 Standard Specification for Rubber Flooring B. ASTM F1859 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering without Backing. C. ASTM F1860 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering with Backing. D. ASTM F1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base 1.3 Quality Control A. Resilient sheet flooring shall meet fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products, per ASTM test method, indicated below by Underwriters laboratories, Inc. (UL) or another recognized testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per square centimeter or more, Class I, per ASTM E Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662. B. Flooring manufacturer shall certify that products supplied for installation comply with local and State of Florida regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC s). 1.4 Submittals A. Product Data: Provide date on products to be used on Project. B. Manufacturer certifications. C. Provide 5 % of installed resilient product of each type and color specified to Owner. 1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Protection A. Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked with the manufacturer s name or brand, type and color, production run number and date of manufacture. B. Materials from containers which have been distorted damaged or opened prior to installation will be rejected. C. Store materials in weathertight and dry storage facility. D. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. E. Protect material from damage by handling and construction operations before, during, and after installation. F. Protect adhesives from freezing. 1.6 Project Conditions A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F and below 90 degrees F. C. Construction in or near areas to receive flooring work shall be complete, dry and cured. Do not install flooring over slabs until they have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with adhesive. Follow flooring manufacturer s recommendations for bond and moisture testing. D. Building shall be permanently enclosed. Schedule construction so that floor receives no construction traffic when completed. Part 2 Products 2.1 Materials A. Resilient Flooring 1. Basis of Design: Allure resilient flooring. a. Size: Varies depending on appearance selection.

138 Resilient Flooring b. Floating installation system: Interlocking edge design with overlapping GripStrip design, no adhesive. c. Each color and pattern of Allure resilient flooring shall be of same production run. 2. Vinyl Composition Flooring: Complying with ASTM F1066, Class 2, through pattern flooring. a. Wearing Surface: Smooth or embossed. b. Thickness: inch. c. Size: 12 inches by 12 inches. d. Each color and pattern of vinyl flooring shall be of same production run. B. Resilient Sheet Flooring 1. Sheet Vinyl Flooring: Complying with ASTM F1913 and material requirements specified in ASTM F1303, Type II, Grade 1, backing classification not applicable. Foam backed sheet flooring is not acceptable. a. Wearing Surface: Smooth or embossed. b. Thickness: 0.08 inch. c. Size: Maximum size sheet vinyl material produced by manufacturer to provide minimum number of joints. Minimum size width acceptable is 60 inches. d. Each color and pattern of sheet flooring shall be of same production run. C. Resilient Base 1. Vinyl or Rubber Base: Complying with ASTM F186, thermoplastics, Group 2 layered. a. Size: 4 inches high. b. Style: B cove, except where carpet occurs use Style A straight. D. Accessories 1. Subfloor Filler: Portland cement based premix latex; type recommended by flooring manufacturers. 2. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof type recommended by flooring manufacturers to suit substrate conditions. a. VOC content to be less than the 50 grams/l when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 (EPA Method 24). 3. Cleaners, Sealers, and Wax/Finish Products: Types recommended by flooring manufacturers. a. Polish: Comply with ASTM D Transitions: Provide tapered transitions of vinyl or rubber at joints between dissimilar flooring materials. Provide vertical lip on transition of ¼ inch maximum. Provide bevel change in level between ¼ and ½ inch with a slope no greater than 1:2. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of Work, are free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials, and are ready to receive resilient product. 3.2 Preparation: Required for all flooring types. (Even when not required by flooring manufacturer.) A. Remove existing flooring. B. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Wood subfloors must be rigid, free from movement and have at least 18 inches of well ventilated air space below. D. Wood floors must be double construction with a minimum thickness of one inch. The top layer of wood shall be APA Underlayment Grade Plywood. E. Clean substrate. 3.3 Installation A. Resilient Flooring 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions.

139 Resilient Flooring Mix pieces from different containers to ensure shade variations are consistent when flooring is placed. 3. Spread only enough adhesive (for vinyl composition flooring) to permit installation of materials before initial set. 4. Set flooring in place and press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. 5. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. 7. Install transition strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates and where indicated. 8. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 9. Extend flooring below appliances, equipment, furniture, etc., to wall behind. B. Resilient Sheet Flooring 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. 2. Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction and avoid cross seams. 3. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but in no case less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 4. Match edges of resilient sheet floor for color shading and pattern at seams. Follow manufacturer s recommendations regarding pattern match. 5. Where resilient sheet flooring abuts other flooring materials floors shall finish level or have transition installed. 6. Extend sheet vinyl floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, under appliances and equipment, etc. 7. Install sheet in full coverage adhesives. a. Air pockets or loose edges will not be accepted. b. Trim sheet materials to touch in the length of intersection at pipes and vertical projections. Seal joints at pipe with waterproof cement or sealant. 8. Keep joints to a minimum to avoid small filler pieces or strips. C. Resilient Base 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. 2. Install base where indicated. Extend base into adjacent closet, alcoves, and around columns. 3. Set base and joints aligned and butted to touch for entire height. 4. Before starting installation, layout base material to provide the minimum number of joints with no strip less than 24 inches in length. Locate joints as remote from corners as the material lengths or the wall configuration will permit. 5. Form corners and end stops as follows: a. Score back of outside corner. b. Score face of inside corner and notch cove. 3.4 Cleaning A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, and wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. 3.5 Protection A. Restrict traffic for 24 hours after installation is complete. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. END OF SECTION

140 Carpeting SECTION CARPETING Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Carpet B. Padding C. Edge Strips D. Adhesives E. Accessories 1.2 References A. 1.3 Quality Assurance A. Installer s Qualifications: A company specializing in carpet installation with a minimum of 3 years experience and employing experienced flooring installers who have retained, and currently hold, an Install Certification, or a certification from a comparable certification program, and a valid OSHA 10 Certification. 1.4 Submittals A. Product Data and sample for carpeting to be installed. B. Single line drawing showing where seams will be located. C. Maintenance data must be submitted to the Owner. D. Provide Owner replacement carpeting, in full size a minimum of 10% of area carpeted. 1.5 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver carpet in manufacturer s original wrappings and packages clearly labeled with manufacturer s brand name, size, dye lot number and related information. Transport carpet to job site in a manner that prevents damage and distortion that might render it unusable. When bending or folding is unavoidable for delivery purposes, unfold carpet and lay flat immediately. B. Deliver adhesives in containers clearly labeled with manufacturer s brand name, number, installation instructions, safety instructions, and flash points. C. Store in a clean, dry, well ventilated area, protected from damage and soiling. Before installation, acclimate carpet to the atmospheric conditions of the areas in which it will be installed for 2 days prior to installation. Part 2 Products 2.1 Materials A. Carpet Tile: Basis of Design, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Berkshire Flooring Carpet Tiles: Tranquility a. Size: 24 inch x 24 inch. b. Backing: Self adhering, peel and stick. c. Pile height:.75 inch d. Face Weight: 25 ounce per square yard. e. Antimicrobial treated, hypoallergenic, and stain resistant. f. Color as approved by Owner from manufacturer s standard. B. Accessories: As required by the manufacturer for a complete and proper installation. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces to be finished prior to commencement of this Work.

141 Carpeting C. Maintain areas in which carpeting is to be installed at a temperature between degrees F with a maximum relative humidity of 65% for 2 days before installation, during installation and for 3 days after installation. 1. Minimum substrate surface temperature should be 65 degrees F at the time of installation. 3.2 Preparation A. Prepare subfloor as recommended by the manufacturer for installation of carpet tiles. B. Level subfloor as recommended by the manufacturer for a proper and complete installation. 3.3 Installation: Install per manufacturer s instructions. 3.4 Protection and Cleaning A. Once carpet installation is complete, clean up scrap materials and debris, and vacuum the area, using manufacturer approved equipment. B. Protect installed carpet from renovation or construction activities, including dust, debris, paint, contractor traffic, etc., until it is ready for its final use. END OF SECTION

142 Painting SECTION PAINTING Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Surface preparation. B. Paint materials. C. Field application of paints. 1.2 References A. ASTM D16 Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials and Applications. B. ASTM D523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. C. ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. D. ASTM D Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. E. ASTM D4442 Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture content Measurement of Wood and Wood- Base Materials. F. Master Painters Institute (MPI): MPI Guide Specifications G. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): SSPC - SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. H. SSPC SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. I. SSPC SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. J. SSPC PA Guide 10, Guide to Safety and Health Requirements. K. US National Archives and Records Administration (NARA): 29 CFR , Air Contaminants. 1.3 Definitions A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. B. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range between 0 and 5 when measured at a 60 degree meter. C. Eggshell refers to a low sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60 degree meter. D. Satin refers to a low to medium sheen finish with gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60 degree meter. E. Semi-gloss refers to a medium sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60 degree meter. F. Gloss refers to a high sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60 degree meter. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Painting Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1. Paint coatings will be applied using safety methods and equipment in accordance with all Federal, State and local laws and regulations. 2. Safety methods used during paint application will comply with the requirements of SSPC PA Guide To protect personnel and Owner from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the most stringent guidance of : a. The applicable manufacturer s Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or local or state regulations. b. 29 CFR c. Low or No-VOC paint for all interior walls. Low- VOC means 50 grams per liter or less for flat paint; 150 grams per liter or less for non-flat paint. B. Provide materials that do not contain asbestos or lead. 1.5 Submittals A. Submit manufacturer of paint to be used on the project. B. Provide a mock up of the exterior paint colors on the property for final approval. Do not purchase all paint until mock up is approve.

143 Painting C. Interior paint colors are to match existing. D. Extra Materials: Deliver 1 gallon of each color used on the property to the Owner. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer s label. 1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Protection A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer s name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. Information shall be legible. C. Use of off brand containers or mixing buckets will not be allowed on the site. D. Paint Materials: store at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in a ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer s instructions. Protect from freezing. E. Store materials at site at least 24 hours before using, at a temperature between 45 and 85 degrees F. 1.7 Project Conditions A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, on surfaces coated with frost, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. C. Do not apply exterior coatings in windy and dusty conditions. D. Do not apply exterior coatings in direct sunlight or on surfaces that will soon be warmed by the sun. E. Application Temperatures for Waterborne Paints: Minimum 45 degrees F for interiors; minimum 50 degrees F for exterior; maximum 90 degrees F, unless required otherwise by manufacturer s instructions. Maintain interior temperatures until paint is completely dry and cured. F. Application Temperatures for Solvent Thinned Paints: Minimum 50 degrees F for interiors and exterior; maximum 95 degrees F unless required otherwise by manufacturer s instructions. Maintain interior temperatures until paint is completely dry and cured. G. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface to conduct painting operations. H. Ventilation: Ventilate affected areas during paint application. Exhaust solvent vapors outdoors, away from air intakes and people. Part 2 Products 2.1 Paint Manufacturers A. Behr B. Benjamin Moore & Co C. Duron, Inc D. Pratt & Lambert E. Sherwin Williams F. Valspar 2.2 Accessories A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners, and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality; and as allowed by manufacturer s recommendations. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of Work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces, using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:

144 Painting Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 8%. 2. Interior or Exterior Wood: 15%, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. D. Adhesion: If required due to questionable appearance, test existing paint for adhesion to substrate in accordance with ASTM D3359, Test Method A. Results shall be a rating of 4 or better in order to be considered sound and a satisfactory base of repainting. E. Coordinate Work with other surfaces scheduled for refinishing. 3.2 Preparation A. General 1. Start of the surface preparation or paint materials application will be construed as applicator s acceptance of the surfaces as satisfactory for application of materials. 2. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. 3. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces of substances that affect Work of this Section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. 4. Marks: Seal with sealer compatible with primer and finish coats marks which may bleed through surface finishes. 5. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 6. Reduce the gloss of glossy surfaces to be painted. 7. Fill nail holes, cracks, chips, spalls, and similar damaged areas to match adjacent undamaged areas. 8. Paint Removal: a. Remove flaking, cracking, blistering, peeling or otherwise deteriorated paint and paint failing adhesion testing, by scraping with hand scrapers. b. After scraping, remove large areas of paint on architectural details using sanders, heat guns or heat plates, or chemical paint removers. Do not use flame heat devices. c. When chemical strippers are used, neutralize substrate after stripping to a ph of 5 to 8.5. d. Remove paint to bare substrate or first sound paint layer. e. Paint removal shall not damage or mar the substrate material. f. After paint removal, feather edge and sand edges smooth of remaining chipped paint. B. Stucco and Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: 1. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 2. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. 3. Allow to age minimum 30 days before painting. 4. Clean of all loose matter that may affect paint application. C. Uncoated Ferrous Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing in accordance with SSPC SP-2, or sandblasting in accordance with SSPC SP-7; clean by washing with solvent or detergent in accordance with SSPC SP-1. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. D. Shop Primed Ferrous Metal Surfaces to be Finish Painted: 1. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch up patches inconspicuous. 2. In flat, exposed surfaces to receive semi-gloss or gloss finish, fill dents, holes and similar voids and depressions in flat exposed surfaces with metal filler compound. Finish flush with adjacent surfaces. 3. Clean surfaces with solvent in accordance with SSPC SP Prime bare steel surfaces immediately upon direction. E. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent in accordance with SSPC SP-1 or detergent. Wipe with metal cleaner, rinse, and wipe dry.

145 Painting F. Metal Doors to be Painted: Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. G. Metal Piping: The semitransparent film applied at the mill to some piping and tubing is not considered a shop applied primer. Where indicated to be painted, overcoat with the specified ferrous metal primer. H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: 1. Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 2. Remove loose dust and dirt by brushing with a soft brush, rubbing with a cloth, or vacuum cleaning. A damp cloth may be used when water based paint materials are to be applied. Allow to dry. I. Wood: 1. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. 2. Scrape and clean small, dry seasoned knots, then apply a thin coat of commercial knot sealer, before application of the priming coat. 3. Scrape off pitch on large, open, unseasoned knots and all other beads or streaks of pitch and sap. If the pitch is still soft, remove the mineral spirits or turpentine, and thinly coat the resinous area with knot sealer. 4. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. 5. Sand between coats. 6. Set finishing nails, fill holes, and prime surface imperfections. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler, colored to match the finish coat if natural finish is required, allowed to dry, and sand smooth. J. Previously Painted Surfaces: 1. Thoroughly remove all release, dirt, dust or other foreign matter. 2. Remove coatings that are blistering, cracking, flaking, peeling, or otherwise deteriorating. 3. Roughen slick surfaces. 4. Repair damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips, and spalls with suitable material to match adjacent undamaged areas. 5. Feather edges of chipped paint, and sand smooth. 6. Clean metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC requirements using solvent, mechanical, or chemical cleaning methods to provide surfaces suitable for painting. Preparation of ferrous surfaces if not specified shall be as recommended by coating manufacturer, but in no case less than SSPC SP Chalk shall be removed so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D4212, the chalk resistance rating is no less than Prime all previously painted surfaces. 9. Comply with all federal, state and local regulations and guidelines regarding regulated materials, including but not limited to lead based paint. 3.3 Installation A. Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer, paint may be applied by brush, roller, or spray. Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be of a type design for the coating to be applied and the surface to be coated. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high pile sheep s wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. B. Thinning: 1. When thinning is required to suit surface, temperature, weather conditions, or application methods, paints may be thinned in accordance with the manufacturer s directions. 2. The use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Thinning shall not cause the paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds.

146 Painting C. Does not mix paint materials of different manufacturers. D. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. E. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. F. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint in a tint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. Difference in tint shall be visible at a distance of 3 feet from the surface. G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. H. Minimum Coating Thickness: 1. Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer s recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness as recommended by manufacturer. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Strip paint to ensure that all edges, corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equal to that of adjacent painted surfaces. 3. Apply each coat of paint so dry film shall be of uniform thickness and free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other voids, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. Hiding shall be complete. If application thickness or color and opacity of the paint do not achieve complete hiding, apply additional coat(s) to achieve complete hiding without change in Contract Price. I. Apply two coats of primer or sealer to surfaces of wood doors, including top and bottom edges that are cut. J. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Wood fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. K. Back prime and seal ends of exterior woodwork and edges of exterior plywood specified to be finished. L. Back prime and seal ends of interior panel backer boards specified to be finished. M. Finishing Mechanical and Electrical Equipment: 1. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. 2. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.4 Protection and Cleaning A. Collect waste material that may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. Upon completion of the Work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers from the site. 3.5 Schedule A. Surfaces to be Finished: 1. Gloss: paints applied to the following substrates shall have the gloss levels indicated, unless noted otherwise: a. Interior and Exterior Steel Doors and Frames: Semi-gloss. b. Ceilings: Flat. c. Interior Walls: Satin, unless otherwise noted 1. Interior Walls of Kitchens and Bathrooms: Semi-gloss. d. Interior and Exterior Miscellaneous trim, hardboard, handrails, etc.: Semi-gloss 2. Do not paint or finish the following items: a. Items fully factory finished, unless specifically noted. b. UL, FMG, or other code-required labels; fire rating labels; and equipment name, identification, performance rating, serial number and capacity labels. c. Stainless steel items. d. Face brick. e. Stone surfaces. 3. Paint the surfaces as follows:

147 Painting a. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with primer only. b. Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. c. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. d. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field finished casework to match exterior. e. Paint both sides and edges of plywood panel backers for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. 4. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. a. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Paint shop primed items occurring in finished areas. c. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. B. Paint Systems Exterior: 1. Concrete, Concrete Masonry Units, and Stucco: a. First Coat: Exterior Primer for Concrete, Concrete Block and Stucco. b. Two Top Coats: Semi Gloss Acrylic Finish Coats. 2. Ferrous metals: a. First Coat: Alkyd ferrous metal primer. b. Two Top Coats: Semi gloss acrylic finish. 3. Galvanized metals: a. First Coat: Acrylic galvanized metal primer. b. Two Top Coats: Semi gloss acrylic finish. 4. Wood and Hardboard Siding: a. First Coat: Acrylic primer. b. Two Top Coats: Semi gloss acrylic finish. C. Paint Systems Interior: 1. Concrete, Concrete Block, and Plaster: a. First Coat: Acrylic primer. b. Two Top Coats: Flat acrylic finish, ceilings only. c. Two Top Coats: Eggshell acrylic finish. d. Two Top Coats: Semi-gloss acrylic finish, kitchen and bathroom walls only. 2. Ferrous Metal: a. First Coat: Alkyd metal primer or b. First Coat: Acrylic primer. c. Two Top Coats: Semi gloss acrylic finish. 3. Galvanized Metal: a. First Coat: Acrylic primer. b. Two Top Coats: Eggshell acrylic enamel finish. 4. Gypsum Board: a. First Coat: Acrylic primer. b. Two Top Coats: Eggshell acrylic enamel finish. c. Two Top coats: Semi-gloss enamel finish, kitchen and bathroom walls only. 5. Gypsum Board Ceilings: a. First Coat: Acrylic primer. b. Two Top Coats: Flat latex paint finish. 6. Wood Trim and Panel Backers, Painted: a. First Coat: Acrylic primer, or b. First Coat: Alkyd primer. c. Two Top Coats: Semi gloss acrylic finish.

148 Painting Wood Trim, Stained: a. First Coat: Oil stain. END OF SECTION

149 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories SECTION TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Accessories. B. Grab bars. 1.2 References A. ASTM A269 Standard Specifications for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. B. ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 1.3 Quality Assurance A. Coordinate the Work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement. Installation of accessories and grab bars without internal wall reinforcement is not permitted. B. Each product shall meet, as a minimum, the requirements specified, and shall be a standard commercial product of a manufacturer regularly presently manufacturing items of type specified. C. Each accessory type shall be assembled to the greatest extent possible before delivery to the site. 1.4 Packaging, Delivery, and Storage A. Pack accessories individually to protect finish. B. Deliver accessories to the project only when installation work in rooms is ready to receive them. C. Deliver products to site in sealed packages of containers; labeled for identification with manufacturer s name, brand, and contents. D. Store products in weathertight and dry storage facility. E. Protect from damage from handling, weather and construction operations before, during and after installation in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. Part 2 Products 2.1 Manufacturers A. Bobrick basis of design. B. A&J Washroom Accessories Inc. C. American Specialties, Inc. D. Bradley Corporation. 2.2 Materials A. Accessories General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. B. Stainless Steel: 1. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316. C. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper proof, security type. In hollow masonry or frame construction use toggle bolts. D. Expansion Shields: Fiber or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.3 Finishes A. Stainless Steel: No 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 2.4 Accessories A. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1 ¼ inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1 ½ inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Product: B-5837 manufactured by Bobrick.

150 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Type 304, 18 gauge, stainless Steel tubing with satin finish. Ends are heliarc welded to concealed mounting flanges. Clearance between grab bar and wall is 1 ½ inches. 3. Concealed Mounting Flanges: Type 304, 1/8 inch thick, stainless steel plate; end flanges 2 inches by 3 1/8 inch with two holes for attachment to wall, with blocking. Intermediate flanges 2 5/8 inches by 3 1/8 inches diameter. 4. Snap Flange covers: Type 304, 22 gauge drawn stainless steel with satin finish. 3 ¼ inch diameter by 4/8 inch deep. Each cover snaps over mounting flange to conceal mounting screws. B. Shower Curtain Rod: Sized to fit existing installation. 1. Product B-6107 manufactured by Bobrick. 2. Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, 20 gauge inch diameter rod. 4. Flanges are 2 ½ inch square. C. Combination Utility Shelf / Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with ½ inch returned edges, 0.06 inches steel wall brackets. 1. Product: B-224 manufactured by Bobrick. 2. Drying rod: Stainless Steel, ¼ inch diameter. 3. Hooks: 2, 0.06 inch stainless steel rag hooks at shelf front. 4. Length 36 inches. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Confirm accessory dimensions with field measurements of existing conditions. D. Verify blocking is installed in walls prior to application of finishes and accessories. 3.2 Installation A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Toggle bolt to steel anchorage plates in frame partitions or hollow masonry. D. Install accessories in a manner that will permit the accessory to function as designed and allow for servicing as required without hampering or hindering the performance of other devices. E. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, and requested by the Owner. 3.3 Cleaning A. After installation, clean as recommended by the manufacturer and protect from damage until completion of the Project. END OF SECTION

151 Equipment SECTION EQUIPMENT Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Kitchen Appliances 1. Refrigerator 2. Dishwasher 3. Range 4. Range Hood 5. Microwave Hood 1.2 References A. UL Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: Manufacturer s data for each piece of equipment installed on project. B. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer s Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section, with not less than 10 years of documented experience. B. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards. 1. Appliances must be Energy Star rated. 2. All Appliances must be new. Part 2 Products 2.1 Kitchen Appliances White in color and Energy Star qualified. A. Refrigerator: General Electric - 18 cubic foot capacity, free standing, top mounted freezer, frost free with glass shelves, or approved equal. B. Dishwasher: General Electric - Slide in, front loading. C. Range: General Electric 4 burner electric range with glass panel oven door, or approved equal. D. Range Hood: General Electric 2 speed fan with control, vented to the exterior, vertical and rear exhaust, with light Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Verify utility needs are in present, correctly located, and proper capacity for appliance. 3.2 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. 3.3 Adjusting A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation. 3.4 Cleaning A. Remove packing materials from equipment and appliances. B. Wash and clean equipment and appliances. END OF SECTION

152 Plumbing SECTION PLUMBING Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Plumbing Work on HCD sponsored rehabilitation projects. 1.2 References A. Federal, State, and Local Building Codes. B. Florida Building Code 1.3 Performance Requirements A. All plumbing work must be completed by a Plumbing Contractor licensed in the State of Florida. B. Obtain and pay for all plumbing permits required for plumbing work. Plumbing code requirements must be met if requirements are stricter than performance requirements specified in this Section. C. Plumbing work that is not replacement in kind shall have engineering documents, as required for obtaining plumbing permits, developed by an engineer licensed for this design work in the State of Florida. D. For Re-piping Projects: 1. The main water line must enter through a low area of a wall into a closet or other approved location and be covered diagonally with a 1 x 6 board to protect the pipe, sealed and painted. a. All penetrations through walls and cabinets must have escutcheon plates installed. b. All holes made through walls, ceilings, etc., must be repaired to match existing adjacent wall surfaces, and primed and painted. 2. Piping is to be replaced from the utility meter to the house with a minimum ¾ inch PVC pipe or as required by state and local building codes, whichever is more restrictive. 3. All hot and cold piping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and per current state and local building codes. 4. New piping in unconditioned space shall be thermo insulated. 5. Install a minimum of two hose bibs with vacuum breakers in accordance with current state and local building codes. a. Old hose bibs must be removed and holes patched with mortar to match existing exterior finish, unless electrical ground is attached. E. All penetrations through walls and cabinets must have escutcheon plates installed, new or existing. F. All holes made through walls (new or existing), ceilings, etc., must be repaired to match existing adjacent wall construction. G. All drains must be snaked out on all Rehabilitation Projects. 1. The main line from the house to the street must be clear. 2. Plumber shall provide certification that all drains are working properly at the time of final inspection. H. All trenches for plumbing work shall be properly filled and compacted to grade level, matching adjacent surfaces and finishes. I. Waste connections will be made from the main waste connection at the home to the city sewer lateral, as required by state and local codes. J. Shower valves must have anti-scald guard at all bathtubs and showers. K. All plumbing fixtures shall be white in color, unless otherwise noted. Part 2 Products 2.1 Plumbing Fixtures: All fixtures must be new. A. Toilets: American Standard, Kohler, or approved equal, 2 piece, high efficiency, low flow, 1.6 gallon flush or less, elongated bowl in white, complying with current state and local building codes, whichever is stricter. 1. All toilets must comply with ADA specifications. B. Sinks

153 Plumbing Kitchen: Stainless steel double bowl with a depth of 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bathroom: American Standard, Kohler, or approved equal, drop in, cast iron with white high gloss enamel finish, unless indicated otherwise. a. Shape: Owner selected round or oval, with front overflow and hole(s) for faucet installation. C. Bathtubs: American Standard Americast or approved equal. Size to meet existing conditions and white in color, unless otherwise indicated. D. Shower Bases: Kohler Ballast style with low threshold design, integral tile-in flange on three sides, durable acrylic with resin concrete core construction, or approved equal. Size to meet existing conditions and white in color, unless otherwise indicated. E. Faucets 1. All faucets must comply with ADA specifications. a. WaterSense labeled products in the bathrooms or to indicated specifications. b. Bathroom faucet: Low flow, 1.5 gallons / minute or less c. Shower head: Low flow, 2.2 gallons / minute or less. 2. Moen is the basis of design for all faucets. a. Style: Brantford in Bathrooms. b. Style: Chateau in Kitchens. Kitchen setup must include side sprayer. c. Finish: Chrome 3. Moen is the basis of design for showerhead. a. Style: Propel 5- Spray 5.5 in. Fixed Shower Head. b. Finish: Chrome 3.1 Plumbing Equipment A. Water Heaters: comply with all applicable state and local building codes, whichever is stricter. 1. Capacity: 40 gallon minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Efficiency: 88% efficiency. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Examine existing conditions to determine Work of this Section is ready to be installed. B. Correct any defects or work that is not compliant with state and local building codes. C. Starting Work of this Section indicates acceptability of existing conditions. 3.2 Installation: Install all fixtures and equipment in accordance to manufacturer s instructions and compliant with state and local building codes. 3.3 Cleaning and Protection: Clean all fixtures and equipment after installation according to manufacturer s instructions and protect until completion of Project. END OF SECTION

154 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning SECTION HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Work on HCD sponsored rehabilitation projects. 1.2 References A. Federal, State, and Local Building Codes. B. Florida Building Code 1.3 Performance Requirements A. All HVAC work must be completed by a Mechanical Contractor licensed in the State of Florida. B. Obtain and pay for all mechanical permits required for HVAC work. Mechanical code requirements must be met if requirements are stricter than performance requirements specified in this Section. C. Mechanical work that is not repair and/or replacement in kind shall have engineering documents, as required for obtaining mechanical permits, developed by a Mechanical Engineer licensed in the State of Florida. D. Size and layout of systems must be approved by the Permitting Services Division. E. HVAC System: Utilize a 15 SEER (Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio) or higher, split system for replacement of existing HVAC systems 1. Heat pumps must have a minimum of 8.5 HSPF (Heating Season Performance Factor). 2. All HVAC equipment must have Energy Star qualification. 3. Air Conditioner Sizing: Utilize the following for the initial sizing of units: a square feet, of area 1.5 tons of cooling. b square feet, 2 tons of cooling. c square feet, 2.5 tons of cooling. d square feet, 3 tons of cooling. e square feet, 3.5 tons of cooling. f square feet, 4 tons of cooling. g. Final sizing is subject to load calculations performed by the licensed Mechanical Contractor and/or Mechanical engineer as required to obtain construction permit(s). 4. Provide all controls, wiring, condensate pumps, thermostats, ducts, dampers, vents, registers, returns, remote panels, exterior pad, etc., required to complete the HVAC system. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, install HVAC equipment in existing equipment locations. a. Exterior equipment shall be set on a concrete pad. If pad does not exist, install new pad as recommended by manufacturer. b. Interior equipment shall be installed on a sealed wood platform with return vents in wall below unit. c. Equipment rooms shall be enclosed with a swing door of sufficient size to allow for equipment installation and maintenance. Bi-fold doors are not acceptable. d. Return air filters for equipment must be easily accessible without need for special tools or substantive relocation of piping, wiring, etc. 6. Ducts: Unless otherwise indicated, attic mounted rigid or flexible. a. Where existing ducts are being retained for reuse with new HVAC equipment, all ducts are to be inspected for damage and/or leaks, repaired, and cleaned. b. New and existing ductwork is to be sealed with mesh tape and mastic or UL approved duct tape. c. New Ducts shall have R-value greater than or equal to Vents: a. New supply vents will be adjustable air flow vents. No fixed in place fins. b. Return vent to be filter back with MERV 10 filter or better.

155 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning F. Existing HVAC systems that are indicated to be inspected and/or cleaned, shall have said Work completed by a Mechanical Contractor licensed in the State of Florida. a. General Contractor shall submit any service recommendations for HVAC system work to HCD personnel on HVAC company proposal. G. Range Hoods or Kitchen Exhaust fans shall have ducted vents, with dampers, to the exterior per applicable state and local building codes. H. Bathroom Fans shall have ducted vents, with dampers, to the exterior per applicable state and local building codes. I. Dryer vents shall have ducted vents, with dampers, to the exterior per applicable state and local building codes. Part 2 Products 1.1 HVAC Equipment: All equipment must be new. A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Rheem. 2. Trane. 3. Carrier. 4. Or approved equal. 1.2 Bathroom Fans: Broan or approved equal. A. Capacity: 90 cfm B. Energy Star qualified. C. Ducted to the exterior. Recirculating is not acceptable. 1.3 Kitchen Fans: Match existing or approved equal, ducted to the exterior. 1.4 Dryer Vents for Interior Walls: Shall utilize Dryerbox by In-O-Vate, or approve equal, to transition from dryer to ducted vent. A. Dryers are to be ducted to the exterior. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Examine existing conditions to determine Work of this Section is ready to be installed. C. Correct any defects or work that is not compliant with state and local building codes. B. Starting Work of this Section indicates acceptability of existing conditions. 3.2 Installation: Install all fixtures and equipment in accordance to manufacturer s instructions and compliant with state and local building codes. 3.3 Cleaning and Protection: Clean all fixtures and equipment after installation according to manufacturer s instructions and protect until completion of Project. END OF SECTION

156 Electrical SECTION ELECTRICAL Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Electrical Work on HCD sponsored rehabilitation projects. 1.2 References A. Federal, State, and Local Building Codes. B. Florida Building Code C. National Electrical Code 1.3 Performance Requirements A. All electrical work must be completed by an Electrical Contractor licensed in the State of Florida. B. Obtain and pay for all mechanical permits required for electrical work. Electrical code requirements must be met if requirements are stricter than performance requirements specified in this Section. C. Electrical work that is not repair and/or replacement in kind shall have engineering documents, as required for obtaining electrical permits, developed by an Electrical Engineer licensed in the State of Florida. D. Size and layout of new electrical service / systems must be approved by the Permitting Services Division. E. All replacement of electrical work must be inspected and approved by local codes enforcement. Correct any work that does not pass inspection. F. Electrical Work: 1. When new electrical service is included in the Scope of Work, install underground where practical and approved by Owner and service provider. 2. Replacement of existing electrical system: Include all interior and exterior panels and disconnects. a. Replacement of electrical meter is only required by code and/or service provider. b. All replacement of electrical systems shall include all panels, disconnects, wiring, connections, etc., required for a complete installation that complies with state and local code requirements. 3. Interior Outlets: Replace all non-gfic outlets within 6 feet of a water source. a. Provide all equipment, parts, wiring, connections, cover plates, etc., necessary for the installation of code compliant GFIC outlets. b. Provide replacement outlets, cover plates, switches, etc., when indicated. 4. Exterior Outlets: Replace all non-protected exterior outlets with GFIC outlets with protective cover boxes. a. Provide all equipment, parts, wiring, connections, protection boxes, etc., necessary for the installation of code compliant protected outlet. 5. Smoke Detectors: Install combination smoke and carbon monoxide detectors in all halls and bedrooms. a. Detectors shall be hardwired with a 9 volt battery backup. b. Provide all wiring, connections, demolition, repairs, etc., necessary for the installation of detectors. 6. Miscellaneous Electrical: Provide power where indicated for miscellaneous installations requiring this work; including but not limited to switches, bathroom exhaust fans, etc. a. Provide all equipment, parts, wiring, connections, demolition and repairs, for a complete installation that is code compliant. 7. Lighting: a. Centralized room light fixtures shall have junction boxes installed, recessed into ceiling, prior to installation of new fixtures. b. All fixtures must be Energy Star qualified. c. Contractor shall protect all existing light fixtures, doorbells, TV cables, telecommunication systems, etc.

157 Electrical d. Replace fixtures where indicated. e. Provide fluorescent bulbs for all new fixtures. f. If a ceiling fan is indicated to be replaced, the replacement must include a light kit. g. Exterior flood lights shall have a motion detector and light sensor. G. Contractor shall protect all existing electrical systems, light fixtures, doorbells, TV cables, telecommunication systems, etc., that are to remain. Part 2 Products 1.1 Ceiling Fans: Hunter brand or approved equivalent, 5 blade, 52 inch diameter, with light kit, unless otherwise indicated. 1.2 Light Fixtures: Standard quality to match existing or as otherwise indicated. 1.3 Electrical Panels, Wiring, Connections, Disconnects, etc.: As allowed and approved by state and local building codes and as required to obtain construction permit(s). Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Examine existing conditions to determine Work of this Section is ready to be installed. C. Correct any defects or work that is not compliant with state and local building codes. B. Starting Work of this Section indicates acceptability of existing conditions. 3.2 Installation: Install all fixtures and equipment in accordance to manufacturer s instructions and compliant with state and local building codes. 3.3 Cleaning and Protection: Clean all fixtures and equipment after installation according to manufacturer s instructions and protect until completion of Project. END OF SECTION

158 Earthwork SECTION EARTHWORK Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Excavation B. Trenching C. Filling and Backfilling 1.2 References A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) AASHTO T180, Standard Specifications for Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop. B. ASTM C136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. C. ASTM D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort. D. ASTM D1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method. E. ASTM D1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort. F. ASTM D2167 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. G. ASTM D2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. H. ASTM D2922 Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods. I. ASTM D 3017 Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods. 1.3 Project Conditions A. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain. B. Protect existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. Part 2 Products 2.1 Fill Materials A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL. B. Structural Fill: Subsoil excavated on site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL. C. Concrete for Fill: Compressive strength of 2500 psi, unless otherwise indicated. D. Granular Fill Gravel: Pit run washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris inch sieve: 100 percent passing inch sieve: 95 percent passing. 3. ¾ inch sieve: percent passing. 4. 5/8 inch sieve: 75 to 100 percent passing. 5. 3/8 inch sieve: 55 to 85 percent passing. E. Sand: Natural River or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136; within the following limits: a. No. 4 sieve: 100 percent passing.

159 Earthwork b. No. 14 sieve: 10 to 100 percent passing. c. No. 50 sieve: 5 to 90 percent passing. d. No. 100 sieve: 4 to 30 percent passing. e. No. 200 sieve: 0 percent passing. F. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on site. 1. Free of roots, rocks larger than ½ inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. 2. Acidity range (ph) of 5.5 to Containing a minimum of 4 percent and a maximum of 25 percent inorganic matter. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. 3.2 Preparation A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. B. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities if required as a part of this Project. C. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.3 Excavation A. Excavate to accommodate construction operations. Conform to all safety protocols. 1. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. 2. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundation, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. C. Hand trim excavations and remove loose matter. D. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 CY. 1. Do not over excavate. Correct over excavation as required by a soils engineer licensed in the State of Florida. E. Grade top perimeter of excavations to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. F. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for reuse from site. G. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.4 Filling A. Fill to existing subgrade elevations after completion of below grade work. B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. E. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. F. Soil fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. G. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet, unless indicated otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. H. Correct areas that are over excavated. 1. Load bearing foundation surfaces: Fill with Concrete. 2. Other Areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent maximum dry density. I. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. J. Fill at Specific Locations: 1. Use General Fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. 2. Under Interior Slabs-On-Grade: a. Use granular fill. b. Depth: 4 inches deep. c. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.

160 Earthwork At Foundation Walls and Footings: a. Use general fill. b. Fill up to subgrade elevation. c. Compact each lift to 90 percent of maximum dry density. d. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls. 4. Over Buried Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank in Trenches: a. Bedding: Use granular fill. b. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 5. At interior Crawl Spaces: a. Use general fill. b. Compact to 90 percent of maximum dry density. c. Install vapor retarder over entire exposed surface. d. Cover with granular fill, 2 inches deep. 6. At Lawn Areas: a. Use top soil. b. Fill up to finish grade elevations. c. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.5 Tolerances A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.6 Clean Up and Protection A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. C. Remove unused stockpiled materials; leave area in a clean and neat condition. D. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION

161 Turf and Grasses SECTION TURF AND GRASSES Part 1 General 1.1 Section Includes A. Sodding. 1.2 References A. Turfgrass Producers International (TPI) TPI, Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding. 1.3 Submittals A. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before sod is installed. 1.4 Deliver, Storage, Handling, and Protection A. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements intpi Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation. B. Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. C. Protect sod from breakage and drying. 1.5 Project Conditions A. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain. Part 2 Products 2.1 Turfgrass Sod: Certified, complying with TPI s Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding. A. Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Species: To match existing adjacent grass surfaces. 2.2 Organic Soil Amendments A. Compost: Well composted, stable and week free organic matter, ph range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1 inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens / m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic matter content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or sourceseparated or compostable mixed solid waste. B. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil or toxic materials. 1. In lieu of decomposed wood derivatives, mix partially decomposed wood derivatives with ammonium nitrate at a minimum rate of 0.15 lb / cu. Ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark, or with ammonium sulfate at a minimum rate of 0.25 lb / cu. Ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark. C. Manure: Well rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth. 2.3 Planting Soils A. Planting Soil: ASTM D5268 topsoil, with ph range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

162 Turf and Grasses Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 Preparation A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. C. Turf Area Preparation: Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. 1. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 ½ inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner s property. a. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. b. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. 1. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within three days. c. Spread planting soil to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. 1. Spread approximately ½ the thickness of planting soil over loosened subgrade. 2. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. 3. Spread remainder of planting soil. 4. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. 2. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: a. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. b. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. c. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. d. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. 3. Finish Grading Grade planting areas to a smooth uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within ½ inch plus or minus of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. 4. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 3.3 Sodding A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs, spaced as recommended by sod grower but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.

163 Turf and Grasses C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1 ½ inches below sod. 3.4 Clean Up and Protection A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. END OF SECTION

164 400 South Orange Avenue, Seventh Floor Orlando, Florida p f cityoforlando.net